Operation Manual
DVD MULTIMEDIA AV NAVIGATION SERVER
AVIC-N4
Notice to all users:
This software requires that the navigation system be properly connected to your vehicle’s
parking brake. If not properly connected and depending on your vehicle, additional instal-
lation may be required. For more information, please contact your Authorized Pioneer
Electronics retailer or call us at (800) 421-1404.
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Introduction
3. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
License Agreement
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES,
CLAIM OR LOSS INCURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPE-
CIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST
PROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPENDI-
TURES, INVESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CONNECTION
WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES)
RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFT-
WARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF,
OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH
DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ANY AND ALL
CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVIDUALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT,
BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MIS-
REPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS. IF PIONEER’S WAR-
RANTY DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN
THIS AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER
BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE
THAT PIONEER’S LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT
(50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIO-
NEER PRODUCT.
PIONEER AVIC-N4 - for U.S.A.
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU, AS THE END
USER, AND PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC. (“PIONEER”).
PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREE-
MENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE INSTALLED
ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY USING THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE TO BE
BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFTWARE
INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY SUP-
PLIER(S) (“SUPPLIERS”), AND YOUR USE OF THE DATABASE IS
COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’ SEPARATE TERMS, WHICH ARE
ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT (Refer to page 3). IF YOU DO
NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS, PLEASE RETURN THE
PIONEER PRODUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFTWARE, AND ANY
WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS OF RECEIPT OF
THE PRODUCTS, TO THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER DEALER FROM
WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF THE SOFTWARE
SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR CONSENT TO THE LICENSE
AGREEMENT.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental
or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer and limitation of
liability shall not be applicable to the extent that they are prohib-
ited by any applicable federal, state or local law which provides
that such a disclaimer or limitation cannot be waived or pre-
empted.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, non exclusive license to
use the software installed on the Pioneer products (the “Soft-
ware”) and the related documentation solely for your own per-
sonal use or for internal use by your business, only on such
Pioneer products.
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate, port, modify or
make derivative works of the Software. You shall not loan, rent,
disclose, publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market or other-
wise transfer the Software or use it in any manner not expressly
authorized by this agreement. You shall not derive or attempt to
derive the source code or structure of all or any portion of the Soft-
ware by reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation, or any
other means. You shall not use the Software to operate a service
bureau or for any other use involving the processing of data for
other persons or entities.
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copyright, trade secret,
patent and other proprietary ownership rights in the Software. The
Software is copyrighted and may not be copied, even if modified
or merged with other products. You shall not alter or remove any
copyright notice or proprietary legend contained in or on the Soft-
ware.
4. EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES
You agree and certify that neither the Software nor any other tech-
nical data received from Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof,
will be exported outside the United States except as authorized
and as permitted by the laws and regulations of the United States.
If the Software has been rightfully obtained by you outside of the
United States, you agree that you will not re-export the Software
nor any other technical data received from Pioneer, nor the direct
product thereof, except as permitted by the laws and regulations
of the United States and the laws and regulations of the jurisdic-
tion in which you obtained the Software.
5. TERMINATION
This Agreement is effective until terminated. You may terminate it
at any time by destroying the Software. The Agreement also will
terminate if you do not comply with any terms or conditions of this
Agreement. Upon such termination, you agree to destroy the Soft-
ware.
You may transfer all of your license rights in the Software, the
related documentation and a copy of this License Agreement to
another party, provided that the party reads and agrees to accept
the terms and conditions of this License Agreement.
6. U.S. GOVERNMENT END USERS
If the Software is being acquired by or on behalf of the United
States government or any other entity seeking or applying rights
similar to those customarily claimed by the United States govern-
ment, the Data is licensed with “Limited Rights”. Utilization of the
Software is subject to the restrictions specified in the “Rights in
Technical Data” clause at DFARS 252.227-7013, or the equivalent
clause for non-defense agencies. Pioneer Electronics (USA) Inc.,
2265 East 220th Street, Long Beach, CA 90810.
2. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
The Software and related documentation are provided to you “AS
IS”. PIONEER AND ITS LICENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provi-
sions 2 and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be collectively
referred to as “Pioneer”) MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WAR-
RANTY FOR THE SOFTWARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE
EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLU-
SION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and may con-
tain some nonconformities, defects or errors. Pioneer does not
warrant that the Software will meet your needs or expectations,
that operation of the Software will be error free or uninterrupted,
or that all non-conformities can or will be corrected. Furthermore,
Pioneer does not make any representations or warranties regard-
ing the use or results of the use of the Software in terms of its
accuracy, reliability or otherwise.
7. MISCELLANEOUS
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer and you regarding
its subject matter. No change in this Agreement shall be effective
unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer retailers do not
have the authority to change this Agreement. This Agreement
shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the inter-
nal laws of the State of California. If any provision of this Agree-
ment is declared invalid or unenforceable, the remaining
provisions of this Agreement shall remain in full force and effect.
1
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
WARE, EVEN IF PIONEER HAS BEEN INFORMED OF, KNEW OF,
OR SHOULD HAVE KNOWN OF THE LIKELIHOOD OF SUCH
DAMAGES. THIS LIMITATION APPLIES TO ANY AND ALL
CAUSES OF ACTION INDIVIDUALLY OR IN THE AGGREGATE,
INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION BREACH OF CONTRACT,
BREACH OF WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, STRICT LIABILITY, MIS-
REPRESENTATION, AND OTHER TORTS. IF PIONEER’S WAR-
RANTY DISCLAIMER OR LIMITATION OF LIABILITY SET FORTH IN
THIS AGREEMENT SHALL OR FOR ANY REASON WHATSOEVER
BE HELD UNENFORCEABLE OR INAPPLICABLE, YOU AGREE
THAT PIONEER’S LIABILITY SHALL NOT EXCEED FIFTY PERCENT
(50%) OF THE PRICE PAID BY YOU FOR THE ENCLOSED PIO-
NEER PRODUCT.
Some states do not allow the exclusion or limitation of incidental
or consequential damages, so the above limitation or exclusion
may not apply to you. This warranty disclaimer and limitation of
liability shall not be applicable to the extent that they are prohib-
ited by any applicable federal, state or local law which provides
that such a disclaimer or limitation cannot be waived or pre-
empted.
PIONEER AVIC-N4 - for Canada
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT BETWEEN YOU, AS THE END
USER, AND PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC. (“PIO-
NEER”). PLEASE READ THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS
AGREEMENT CAREFULLY BEFORE USING THE SOFTWARE
INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS. BY USING THE SOFT-
WARE INSTALLED ON THE PIONEER PRODUCTS, YOU AGREE
TO BE BOUND BY THE TERMS OF THIS AGREEMENT. THE SOFT-
WARE INCLUDES A DATABASE LICENSED BY THIRD PARTY
SUPPLIER(S) (“SUPPLIERS”), AND YOUR USE OF THE DATA-
BASE IS COVERED BY THE SUPPLIERS’ SEPARATE TERMS,
WHICH ARE ATTACHED TO THIS AGREEMENT (Refer to page 3).
IF YOU DO NOT AGREE WITH ALL OF THESE TERMS, PLEASE
RETURN THE PIONEER PRODUCTS (INCLUDING THE SOFT-
WARE, AND ANY WRITTEN MATERIALS) WITHIN FIVE (5) DAYS
OF RECEIPT OF THE PRODUCTS, TO THE AUTHORIZED PIONEER
DEALER FROM WHICH YOU PURCHASED THEM. USE OF THE
SOFTWARE SHALL BE DEEMED TO BE YOUR CONSENT TO THE
LICENSE AGREEMENT.
1. GRANT OF LICENSE
4. EXPORT LAW ASSURANCES
Pioneer grants to you a non-transferable, nonexclusive license to
use the software installed on the Pioneer products (the “Soft-
ware”) and the related documentation solely for your own per-
sonal use or for internal use by your business, only on such
Pioneer products.
You agree and certify that neither the Software nor any other tech-
nical data received from Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof,
will be exported outside Canada except as authorized and as per-
mitted by the laws and regulations of Canada. If the Software has
been rightfully obtained by you outside of Canada, you agree that
you will not re-export the Software nor any other technical data
received from Pioneer, nor the direct product thereof, except as
permitted by the laws and regulations of Canada and the laws and
regulations of the jurisdiction in which you obtained the Software.
You shall not copy, reverse engineer, translate, port, modify or
make derivative works of the Software. You shall not loan, rent,
disclose, publish, sell, assign, lease, sublicense, market or other-
wise transfer the Software or use it in any manner not expressly
authorized by this agreement. You shall not derive, or attempt to
derive, the source code or structure of all or any portion of the
Software by reverse engineering, disassembly, decompilation, or
any other means. You shall not use the Software to operate a ser-
vice bureau or for any other use involving the processing of data
for other persons or entities.
Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall retain all copyright, trade secret,
patent and other proprietary ownership rights in the Software. The
Software is copyrighted and may not be copied, even if modified
or merged with other products. You shall not alter or remove any
copyright notice or proprietary legend contained in or on the Soft-
ware.
5. TERMINATION
This Agreement is effective until terminated. You may terminate it
at any time by destroying the Software. The Agreement also will
terminate if you do not comply with any terms or conditions of this
Agreement. Upon such termination, you agree to destroy the Soft-
ware.
6. MISCELLANEOUS
This is the entire Agreement between Pioneer and you regarding
its subject matter. No change in this Agreement shall be effective
unless agreed to in writing by Pioneer. Pioneer retailers do not
have the authority to change this Agreement. This Agreement
shall be governed by and construed in accordance with the inter-
nal laws of the Province of Ontario and the federal laws of Canada
applicable therein. If any provision of this Agreement is declared
invalid or unenforceable, the remaining provisions of this Agree-
ment shall remain in full force and effect.
You may transfer all of your license rights in the Software, the
related documentation and a copy of this License Agreement to
another party, provided that the party reads and agrees to accept
the terms and conditions of this License Agreement.
2. DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTY
The Software and related documentation are provided to you “AS
IS”. PIONEER AND ITS LICENSOR(S) (for the purpose of provi-
sions 2 and 3, Pioneer and its licensor(s) shall be collectively
referred to as “Pioneer”) MAKES AND YOU RECEIVE NO WAR-
RANTY FOR THE SOFTWARE, WHETHER EXPRESS OR IMPLIED,
AND ALL WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS
FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE FOR THE SOFTWARE ARE
EXPRESSLY EXCLUDED. SOME STATES DO NOT ALLOW EXCLU-
SION OF IMPLIED WARRANTIES, SO THE ABOVE EXCLUSION
MAY NOT APPLY TO YOU. The Software is complex and may con-
tain some nonconformities, defects or errors. Pioneer does not
warrant that the Software will meet your needs or expectations,
that operation of the Software will be error-free or uninterrupted,
or that all non-conformities can or will be corrected. Furthermore,
Pioneer does not make any representations or warranties regard-
ing the use or results of the use of the Software in terms of its
accuracy, reliability or otherwise.
3. LIMITATION OF LIABILITY
IN NO EVENT SHALL PIONEER BE LIABLE FOR ANY DAMAGES,
CLAIM OR LOSS INCURRED BY YOU (INCLUDING, WITHOUT
LIMITATION, COMPENSATORY, INCIDENTAL, INDIRECT, SPE-
CIAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, OR EXEMPLARY DAMAGES, LOST
PROFITS, LOST INCOME, LOST SALES OR BUSINESS, EXPENDI-
TURES, INVESTMENTS, OR COMMITMENTS IN CONNECTION
WITH ANY BUSINESS, LOSS OF ANY GOODWILL, OR DAMAGES)
RESULTING FROM THE USE OF OR INABILITY TO USE THE SOFT-
2
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7. U.S. Government Rights.
Terms and Conditions for the Tele Atlas
Data
THIS IS A LEGAL AGREEMENT (THE “AGREEMENT”) BETWEEN
YOU, THE END USER, AND TELE ATLAS NORTH AMERICA, INC.
(“Tele Atlas”). BY USING YOUR COPY OF THE TELE ATLAS DATA,
YOU AGREE TO THE TERMS AND CONDITIONS OF THIS AGREE-
MENT.
If you are an agency, department, or other entity of the United
States Government, or funded in whole or in part by the United
States Government, then use, duplication, reproduction, release,
modification, disclosure or transfer of this commercial product
and accompanying documentation, is restricted in accordance
with the LIMITED or RESTRICTED rights as described in DFARS
252.227-7014(a)(1) (JUN 1995) (DOD commercial computer soft-
ware definition), DFARS 227.7202-1 (DOD policy on commercial
computer software), FAR 52.227-19 (JUN 1987) (commercial com-
puter software clause for civilian agencies), DFARS 252.227-7015
(NOV 1995) (DOD technical data – commercial items clause); FAR
52.227-14 Alternates I, II, and III (JUN 1987) (civilian agency tech-
nical data and noncommercial computer software clause); and/or
FAR 12.211 and FAR 12.212 (commercial item acquisitions), as
applicable. In case of conflict between any of the FAR and DFARS
provisions listed herein and this License, the construction that
provides greater limitations on the Government’s rights shall con-
trol. Contractor/manufacturer is Tele Atlas North America, Inc., 11
Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH 03766-1445. Phone: 603.643. 0330.
The Data is ©1984-2007 by Tele Atlas. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED.
For purpose of any public disclosure provision under any federal,
state or local law, it is agreed that the Data is a trade secret and a
proprietary commercial product and not subject to disclosure.
1. Grant of License.
Tele Atlas grants you a non-transferable, non-exclusive license to
use the map data and business points of interest information (the
“POIs”), (together, the “Data”) contained on these discs, solely for
personal, non-commercial use and not to operate a service
bureau or for any other use involving the processing of data of
other persons or entities. You may make one (1) copy of the Data
for archival or backup purposes only but you may not otherwise
copy, reproduce, modify, make derivative works, derive the struc-
ture of or reverse engineer the Data. The Data contains confiden-
tial and proprietary information and materials, and may contain
trade secrets, so you agree to hold the Data in confidence and in
trust and not to disclose the Data or any portions in any form,
including by renting, leasing, publishing, leasing, sublicensing or
transferring the Data to any third party. You are prohibited from
removing or obscuring any copyright, trademark notice or restric-
tive legend.
If you are an agency, department, or other entity of any State gov-
ernment, the United States Government or any other public entity
or funded in whole or in part by the United States Government,
then you hereby agree to protect the Data from public disclosure
and to consider the Data exempt from any statute, law, regulation,
or code, including any Sunshine Act, Public Records Act, Free-
dom of Information Act, or equivalent, which permits public
access and/or reproduction or use of the Data. In the event that
such exemption is challenged under any such laws, this Agree-
ment shall be considered breached and any and all right to retain
any copies or to use of the Data shall be terminated and consid-
ered immediately null and void. Any copies of the Data held by you
shall immediately be destroyed. If any court of competent jurisdic-
tion considers this clause void and unenforceable, in whole or in
part, for any reason, this Agreement shall be considered termi-
nated and null and void, in its entirety, and any and all copies of
the Data shall immediately be destroyed.
2. Ownership.
The Data is copyrighted by Tele Atlas and its licensors and they
retain all ownership rights in the Data. You agree not to alter,
remove, obliterate, or obscure any copyright notice or proprietary
legend contained in or on the Data.
3. Warranty Disclaimer.
THE DATA IS PROVIDED ON AN “AS IS” AND “WITH ALL FAULTS
BASIS” AND TELE ATLAS AND ITS SUPPLIERS EXPRESSLY DIS-
CLAIM ALL WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING
BUT NOT LIMITED TO, THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF NON-
INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, SATISFACTORY QUALITY,
ACCURACY, TITLE AND FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
NO ORAL OR WRITTEN ADVICE OR INFORMATION PROVIDED
BY TELE ATLAS OR ANY OF ITS AGENTS, EMPLOYEES OR THIRD
PARTY PROVIDERS SHALL CREATE A WARRANTY, AND YOU
ARE NOT ENTITLED TO RELY ON ANY SUCH ADVICE OR INFOR-
MATION. THIS DISCLAIMER OF WARRANTIES IS AN ESSENTIAL
CONDITION OF THE AGREEMENT.
8. Additional Provisions with respect to POI Data
only.
a. No Creation of Mailing Lists.
You are prohibited from using the POIs (i) to create mailing
lists or (ii) for other such similar uses.
4. Limitation of Liability.
TELE ATLAS SHALL NOT BE LIABLE TO YOU FOR ANY INCIDEN-
TAL, CONSEQUENTIAL, SPECIAL, INDIRECT OR EXEMPLARY
DAMAGES ARISING OUT OF THIS AGREEMENT, INCLUDING
LOST PROFITS OR COSTS OF COVER, LOSS OF USE OR BUSI-
NESS INTERRUPTION OR THE LIKE, REGARDLESS OF
WHETHER YOU WERE ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH
DAMAGES. NOTWITHSTANDING ANYTHING TO THE CONTRARY
CONTAINED HEREIN, TELE ATLAS SHALL HAVE NO MONETARY
LIABILITY TO YOU FOR ANY CAUSE (REGARDLESS OF THE FORM
OF ACTION) UNDER OR RELATING TO THIS AGREEMENT.
b. Compliance.
You will use the POIs in compliance with all applicable federal,
state and local laws, rules and regulations.
c. Indemnification.
You shall indemnify and hold infoUSA, Inc. harmless against
all third party claims or liability which are based in whole or in
part of the users failure to comply with such laws, rules and
regulations or which result from the use of the POIs through
you.
5. Termination.
This Agreement will terminate immediately and automatically,
without notice, if you breach any term of this Agreement. You
agree that in the event of termination of the Agreement, you shall
return the Data (including all documentation and all copies) to
Tele Atlas and its suppliers.
d. Warranty.
In addition to the Warranties contained in the Agreement, YOU
UNDERSTAND THAT THE POIS ARE LICENSED ON AN “AS
IS” BASIS WITHOUT GUARANTEE, AND THERE ARE NO
OTHER WARRANTIES MADE WHETHER, EXPRESS OR
IMPLIED, INCLUDING WITHOUT LIMITATION, ANY EXPRESS
OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR FIT-
NESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
6. Indemnity.
You agree to indemnify, defend and hold Tele Atlas, its Licensors,
and its Suppliers (including their respective licensors, suppliers,
assignees, subsidiaries, affiliated companies, and the respective
officers, directors, employees, shareholders, agents and represen-
tatives) free and harmless from and against any liability, loss,
injury (including injuries resulting in death), demand, action, cost,
expense, or claim of any kind or character, including but not lim-
ited to attorney's fees, arising out of or in connection with any use
or possession by you of the Data.
e. POIs Segregation.
You are prohibited from combining or merging the POIs with
any other POI data. The POIs shall be maintained in such a
way that they are separately identifiable from all other POI data
at all times.
3
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
9. Miscellaneous.
Copyright
This is the exclusive and complete Agreement between Tele Atlas
and you regarding its subject matter. Nothing in this Agreement
shall create a joint venture, partnership or principal-agent rela-
tionship between Tele Atlas and you. The internal laws of Califor-
nia shall govern this Agreement and you consent to the
jurisdiction of the Northern District of California or the State of
California for the County of Santa Clara. Sections 2 – 4 and 7 – 11
shall survive the expiration or termination of this Agreement. This
Agreement may be amended, altered, or modified only by Tele
Atlas. You may not assign any part of this Agreement without Tele
Atlas’ prior written consent. You acknowledge and understand
that the Data may be subject to restrictions on exportation and
agree to comply with any applicable export laws. In the event that
any provision or part of a provision of this Agreement is deter-
mined to be invalid, illegal, or unenforceable, such provision or
part thereof shall be stricken from this Agreement and the
remainder of this Agreement shall be valid, legal, and enforceable
to the maximum extent possible. Any notice under this Agreement
shall be delivered by courier to Tele Atlas North America, Inc.,
Attention Contracts Department, 11 Lafayette Street, Lebanon, NH
03766 USA. The covenants and obligations undertaken by you
herein are intended for the direct benefit of Tele Atlas and may be
enforced by Tele Atlas directly against you.
©1984-2007 Tele Atlas, Rel. 03/2006
“NOTICE
© 2001 – 2007 Tele Atlas. All rights reserved. This material is pro-
prietary and the subject of copyright protection and other intellec-
tual property rights owned or licensed to Tele Atlas. Tele Atlas is
an authorized distributor of selected Statistics Canada computer
files under Agreement number 6776 and is an authorized distribu-
tor of selected Geomatics Canada computer files. The product
includes information copied with permission from Canadian
authorities, including © Canada Post Corporation. The use of this
material is subject to the terms of a License Agreement. You will
be held liable for any unauthorized copying or disclosure of this
material.”
Data by Info USA ©2007 All Rights Reserved.
About the Data for the Map Database
•
•
•
This database was developed and recorded up to April 2006.
Changes to streets/highways made after that time may not be
reflected in this database.
It is strictly prohibited to reproduce and use any part or the
whole of this map in any form without permission from the
copyright owner.
If the local traffic regulations or conditions deviate from this
data, follow the local traffic regulations (such as signs, indica-
tions, etc.) and conditions (such as construction, weather,
etc.).
© 2007 INCREMENT P CORP. ALL RIGHTS RESERVED
•
The traffic regulation data used in the map database applies
only to standard sized passenger vehicles. Note that regula-
tions for larger vehicles, motorbikes, and other non-standard
vehicles are not included in the database.
4
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the LCD panel 25
Introduction
License Agreement 1
PIONEER AVIC-N4 - for U.S.A. 1
PIONEER AVIC-N4 - for Canada 2
Copyright 4
Table of Contents 5
Manual Overview 9
Terminology 10
Important Safety Information 11
Notes Before Using the System and Additional
Failure to operate 12
Visit Our Web site 12
Precaution 12
Additional Safety Information 13
Color difference of the map display between day
and night 14
When using a display connected to REAR OUT
(VIDEO OUT) 14
Purchasing software upgrade 14
Features 14
Playable Discs 17
Basic Navigation 28
Memory navi mode 31
Selecting an AV source 32
Shortcut menu 36
DVD-Video disc region numbers 18
What the Marks on DVDs Indicate 18
About WMA 18
About AAC 18
About DivX 18
About the SAT RADIO READY Logo 19
About the XM NAVTRAFFIC Logo 19
Resetting the Microprocessor 20
Reset the navigation system without changing
the condition memory 20
Reset the navigation system to the initial (facto-
ry) setting 20
DVD Map Discs for Your Navigation System 21
Configuration of data recorded on discs 21
Initial Use 21
Chapter 3
Setting a Route to Your Destination
Finding Your Destination by Selecting the Type of
Facility 43
Searching the facilities around the scroll
cursor 44
Setting an Entrance or Exit of a Freeway as Your
Destination 45
Searching for Your Destination by Specifying the
Telephone Number 45
Route Calculation to Your Home Location or to
Your Favorite Location 45
Selecting Destination from the Destination Histo-
ry and Address Book 45
Canceling the Route Guidance 46
Checking the Set Route 46
Chapter 1
Basic Operation
Navigation unit 23
Flow from Startup to Termination 24
5
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the set route from the shortcut
menu 47
Recalculating a specified distance in the route
ahead of your current position 48
Editing a way point 48
Skipping a way point 49
Displaying Certain POI on the Map 50
tion positions 70
Items Users can Change 73
Registering a POI shortcut 51
Short-Cut Selection 74
Items that users can operate 52
Perform the route calculation for several route
Time 76
Chapter 4
Editing the Navigation Utilities
Registering your home and your favorite
location 55
Registering a previous location in the Address
Book 56
Deleting Address Book or Destination History
information 57
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD
Changing the position of locations registered in
the Address Book 58
Loading registered locations data from a
Disc 58
Using XM NavTraffic Information 59
Touch key operation (DVD-V) 82
Operation using the Function menu (CD,
ROM) 87
Touch key operation (DivX) 87
Operation using the Function menu (DivX) 88
Other functions (DivX) 89
Viewing traffic list 59
Confirming traffic information on the map 60
route ahead 60
When checking traffic congestion information
manually 61
Traffic flow information 61
Selecting traffic information to display 62
Using the XM Tuner to View Stock, Sports, and
Other Information 63
Displaying stock prices 63
Storing browsable information 64
Displaying favorite browsable Information 64
Checking the Reception Status of the XM
Radio 90
Listening to the radio 90
Switching between the detail information dis-
play and the preset list display 91
Storing and recalling broadcast frequencies 91
Advanced radio operation 91
Storing the strongest broadcast frequencies 92
Tuning in strong signals 92
Tuner 65
Emergency Info 65
6
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV
Equipment)
Transferring the phone book 111
Multi-DVD Player 93
Playing a disc 93
USB 94
memory 94
Displaying text information 94
Advanced USB operation 95
Repeating play 95
XM Tuner 96
Switching between the detailed information dis-
Switching the XM display 97
Selecting a channel from the XM channel list
display 98
iPod 115
Operating iPod 115
Repeating play 117
Advanced BT-Audio operation 119
Operate the external unit by using 1 KEY — 6
Using the direct traffic announcement
function 99
SIRIUS Tuner 100
Switching the SIRIUS channel select mode 101
Switching between the detailed information dis-
Selecting a channel in the channel
category 102
Using the direct traffic announcement
function 103
Chapter 8
Display the Radio ID 103
Advanced SIRIUS tuner operation 103
Hands-free Phoning 105
Hands-free phoning with cellular phones featur-
ing Bluetooth technology 105
Customizing the AV Source Setting
Audio Adjustments 123
Introduction to audio adjustments 123
Using the equalizer 123
About the telephone source standby mode 105
Setting up for hands-free phoning 105
Making a call by entering phone number 106
Making a call from the history list 106
Making a call from the preset dial list 107
Calling a number in the phone book 107
Using balance adjustment 124
Adjusting equalizer curves 124
Setting the simulated sound stage 125
Adjusting loudness 125
Using subwoofer output 125
Using non fading output 125
7
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the high pass filter 126
Setting Up the DVD/DivX Player 126
DVD/DivX Setup adjustments 126
Setting angle icon display 127
Setting the parental lock 127
Displaying your DivX® VOD registration
code 128
Initial Settings 128
Adjusting initial settings 128
Setting the rear output and subwoofer
controller 129
Switching the 5.1CH setting 130
Other Functions 130
Setting the illumination color 132
Setting the screen color 132
Operating the Picture Adjustment 133
DVD-R/-RW and CD-R/-RW 158
DivX video files 160
Language Code Chart for DVD 134
Appendix
Anti-theft function 135
Adjusting the Response Positions of the Touch
Memory Navi Mode 138
Navigation in the memory navi mode 138
About the icon for the memory navi mode 139
Major restrictions during the memory navi
mode 140
Cautions relating to auto reroute in memory
navi mode 140
TRAFFIC icon during the
memory navi mode 141
Operation outside the memorized area 141
Positioning Technology 141
Positioning by GPS 141
Positioning by dead reckoning 141
Roads included in the route guidance and roads
not included 164
Non routable roads (pink color road) 164
Glossary 165
Specifications 167
Display Information 169
NAVI MENU 169
Shortcut menu 172
Menu in the AV Screen 173
Sound menu 173
Initial menu 173
System menu 174
Function menu 175
8
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Manual Overview
This manual provides the important information you need to make full use of your new navigation sys-
tem.
Please note that when you have decided what you want to do, you can find the page you need from the
“Table of Contents”.
If you want to check the meaning of each item displayed on the screen, you will find the necessary page
How to use this manual
For safety reasons, it is particularly important that you fully understand your navigation system before
using it. Be sure to read the Introduction, Chapter 1 in particular.
Basic Operation
This chapter describes the names of each part of the navigation system and the
It also describes basic operations for playing a CD in the navigation system.
Navigation Menu and Map Display
view or map scale.
3
4
5
Setting a Route to Your Destination
conditions, and the route operation during route guidance.
Editing the Navigation Utilities
places you have visited.
Customizing Your Navigation System
The behavior of your navigation system depends on a number of settings. If you need to
change any of the initial settings (default settings), read the relevant section of this chapter.
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
Describes how to use DVD-Video, CD, ROM, DivX and the radio.
6
7
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
When Pioneer audio equipment is connected to the navigation system, that equipment can
be operated from the navigation system. This chapter describes the operation of the audio
source that can be used when Pioneer audio equipment is connected.
Customizing the AV Source Setting
Using the audio source, various settings are available to suit your audio-visual taste. This
chapter describes how to change the settings.
8
9
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
Read the appendix to learn more about your navigation system and such information as the
availability of after-care. Please see “Display Information” section at the end of this manual
for checking the details of each item on the menu.
Terminology
Before moving on, take a few minutes to read the following information about the conventions used in
this manual. Familiarity with these conventions will help you greatly as you learn how to use your new
equipment.
e.g.)
MENU button, MAP button.
• Items in the different menus or touch keys available on the screen are described in quotations (“ ”)
and bold:
e.g.)
“Destination”, “Settings”.
• Extra information, alternative use and other notes are presented like this:
e.g.)
❒ After removing the disc from the slot, keep it in the case.
• The references are indicated like this:
e.g.)
➲ Setting the Route Options ➞ Page 52
About the definition of terminology
“Front Display” and “Rear Display”
In this manual, the screen that is attached to the body of this navigation unit will be referred to as the
“Front Display”. Any additional optional screen that is purchased for use in conjunction with this navi-
gation unit will be referred to as the “Rear Display”.
“Video image”
“Video image” in this manual indicates the moving image of DVD-Video, DivX, iPod videos, and the
equipment that is connected to this system with a RCA cable, such as a general-purpose AV equip-
ment.
10
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ To promote safety, certain functions are dis-
abled unless the vehicle is stopped and/or the
parking brake is applied.
Important Safety Information
Before using your navigation system, be sure to
read and fully understand the following safety
information:
❒ The data encoded in the disc for the naviga-
tion system is the intellectual property of the
provider, and the provider is responsible for
such content.
❒ Read the entire manual before operating this
navigation system.
❒ Keep this manual handy as a reference for
❒ The navigation features of your navigation sys-
tem (and rear view camera option if pur-
chased) are intended solely as an aid to you in
the operation of your vehicle. It is not a substi-
tute for your attentiveness, judgment, and
care when driving.
operating procedures and safety information.
❒ Pay close attention to all warnings in this
manual and follow the instructions carefully.
❒ Do not install the navigation unit where it may
(i) obstruct the driver’s vision, (ii) impair the
performance of any of the vehicle’s operating
systems or safety features, including air bags,
hazard lamp buttons or (iii) impair the driver’s
ability to safely operate the vehicle.
❒ Do not operate this navigation system (or the
rear view camera option if purchased) if doing
so will divert your attention in any way from
the safe operation of your vehicle. Always
observe safe driving rules and follow all exist-
ing traffic regulations. If you experience diffi-
culty in operating the system or reading the
display, park your vehicle in a safe location
and apply the parking brake before making
the necessary adjustments.
❒ Please remember to wear your seat belt at all
times while operating your vehicle. If you are
ever in an accident, your injuries can be con-
siderably more severe if your seat belt is not
properly buckled.
❒ Using the most current map DVDs will allow
for most accurate destination mapping.
Upgrade DVDs are available for purchase
through your local Pioneer dealer.
❒ Never allow others to use the system unless
they have read and understood the operating
instructions.
❒ Never use this navigation system to route to
hospitals, police stations, or similar facilities
in an emergency. Please call 911.
❒ Never use headphones while driving.
❒ Route and guidance information displayed by
this equipment is for reference purposes only.
It may not accurately reflect the latest permis-
sible routes, road conditions, one way streets,
road closures, or traffic restrictions.
❒ Do not attempt to install or service your navi-
gation system by yourself. Installation or ser-
vicing of the navigation system by persons
without training and experience in electronic
equipment and automotive accessories may
be dangerous and could expose you to the risk
of electric shock or other hazards.
❒ Traffic restrictions and advisories currently in
force should always take precedence over
guidance given by the navigation system.
Always obey current traffic restrictions, even if
the navigation system provides contrary
advice.
❒ Failure to input correct information about the
local time may result in the navigation system
providing improper routing and guidance
instructions.
❒ Never set the volume of your navigation sys-
tem so high that you cannot hear outside traf-
fic and emergency vehicles.
11
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Notes Before Using the System
and Additional Safety Informa-
tion
Visit Our Web site
Visit us at the following site:
In Canada
Information to User
Alteration or modifications carried out with-
out appropriate authorization may invalidate
the user’s right to operate the equipment.
1. Register your product. We will keep the details
of your purchase on file to help you refer to this
information in the event of an insurance claim
such as loss or theft.
For Canadian model
This Class B digital apparatus complies with
Canadian ICES-003.
2. Receive updates on the latest products and
technologies.
3. Download owner’s manuals, order product cat-
alogues, research new products, and much
more.
4. Receive notices of software upgrades and soft-
ware updates.
Important (Serial Number:)
The serial number of this device is located on the
bottom of this product. For your own security and
convenience, be sure to record this number on
the enclosed warranty card.
Precaution
Failure to operate
Should the navigation system fail to operate prop-
erly, contact your dealer or the nearest authorized
Pioneer service facility.
CAUTION: USE OF CONTROL OR ADJUST-
MENT OR PERFORMANCE OF
PROCEDURES OTHER THAN
THOSE SPECIFIED HEREIN MAY
RESULT IN HAZARDOUS RADIA-
TION EXPOSURE.
After-sales service for Pioneer
products
CAUTION: THE USE OF OPTICAL INSTRU-
MENTS WITH THIS PRODUCT
WILL INCREASE EYE HAZARD.
Please contact the dealer or distributor from
where you purchased the product for its after-
sales service (including warranty conditions) or
any other information. In case the necessary
information is not available, please contact the
companies listed below:
• Protect this product from moisture.
• If the battery is disconnected or discharged,
the memory will be erased and must be repro-
grammed.
Please do not ship your product to the compa-
nies at the addresses listed below for repair with-
out making advance contact.
CANADA
U.S.A
f
Pioneer Electronics o
Canada, Inc.
Pioneer Electronics
(USA) Inc.
CUSTOMER
SATISFACTION
DEPARTMENT
300 Allstate Parkw
Markham, Ontario
L3R 0P2
CUSTOMER SUP-
PORT DIVISION
P.O. Box 1760
Long Beach, CA
90801-1760
ay
800-421-1404
1-877-283-5901
For warranty information, please see the Limited
Warranty sheet included with your product.
12
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
motion, there is an interlock system that senses
when the parking brake is set and when the vehi-
cle is moving. If you attempt to use the functions
described above while driving, they will become
disabled until you stop the vehicle in a safe place,
and apply the parking brake. Please keep the
brake pedal pushed down before releasing the
parking brake.
• Handling the cord on this product or cords
associated with accessories sold with the
product may expose you to chemicals
listed on proposition 65 known to the State
of California and other governmental enti-
ties to cause cancer and birth defects or
other reproductive harm. Wash hands after
handling.
• To avoid the risk of damage and injury and
the potential violation of applicable laws,
the navigation system is not for use with a
“Video image” that is visible to the driver.
• In some countries or states the viewing of
“Video image” on a display inside a vehi-
cle even by persons other than the driver
may be illegal. Where such regulations
apply, they must be obeyed.
This product contains mercury. Disposal of
this material may be regulated due to environ-
mental considerations. For disposal or recy-
cling information, please contact your local
authorities or the Electronics Industries Alli-
ance:
www.eiae.org
• When applying the parking brake in order
to view “Video image” or to enable other
functions offered by the navigation sys-
tem, park your vehicle in a safe place, and
keep the brake pedal pushed down before
releasing the parking brake if the vehicle
is parked on a hill or otherwise might
move when releasing the parking brake.
The backlighting lamp of LCD in this equip-
ment contains mercury. Disposal of this
material may be regulated due to environ-
mental considerations according to Local,
State or Federal Laws. For disposal or recy-
cling information, please contact your local
authorities or the Electronics Industries Alli-
ance:
www.eiae.org
• Accuracy/performance of interlock may be
impacted by such factors as GPS signal
detection, speed pulse wire connectivity,
and driving habits or conditions of the
place where the vehicle is parked.
• It is strongly suggested that the speed
pulse wire be connected for accuracy of
navigation and better performance of
interlock.
• Do not allow this product to come into
contact with liquids. Electrical shock could
result. Also, damage to the product,
smoke, and overheating could result from
contact with liquids.
• If the speed pulse wire is unavailable for
some reason, it is recommended that the
pulse generator ND-PG1 (sold separately)
be used.
Additional Safety Information
To ensure safe driving
When you attempt to watch “Video image” while
driving, the warning “Viewing of front seat
video source while driving is strictly prohib-
ited.” will appear on the screen. To watch “Video
image” on this display, stop the vehicle in a safe
place and apply the parking brake. Please keep
Parking brake interlock
Certain functions (such as viewing of DVD-Video
and certain touch key operations) offered by this
navigation system could be dangerous and/or
unlawful if used while driving. To prevent such
functions from being used while the vehicle is in
13
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the brake pedal pushed down before releasing
the parking brake.
• SCREEN IMAGE MAY APPEAR
REVERSED.
• USE INPUT ONLY FOR REVERSE OR
MIRROR IMAGE REAR VIEW CAMERA.
OTHER USE MAY RESULT IN INJURY
OR DAMAGE.
Color difference of the map dis-
play between day and night
• The rear view camera function is to be
used as an aid to keep an eye on trailers, or
while backing up. Do not use for entertain-
ment purposes.
• Please note that the edges of the rear view
camera images may differ slightly accord-
ing to whether full screen images are dis-
played when backing up, and whether the
images are used for checking the rear
when the vehicle is moving forward.
Night display
The examples in this manual are illustrated using
the daytime display. When driving at night, the
colors you see may differ from those shown.
➲ “Day/Night Display” ➞ Page 75
When using a display connected
to REAR OUT (VIDEO OUT)
This product’s REAR OUT (VIDEO OUT) is for
connection of a display to enable passengers in
the rear seats to watch visual images.
• The rear view mode is to use the naviga-
tion system as an aid to keep an eye on the
trailers, or while backing up. Do not use
this function for entertainment purposes.
• NEVER install the rear display in a loca-
tion that enables the driver to watch visual
images while driving.
Purchasing software upgrade
Using the most current map DVDs will allow for
most accurate destination mapping. Upgrade
DVDs are available for purchase through your
local Pioneer dealer.
To avoid battery exhaustion
Be sure to run the vehicle engine while using this
product. Using this product without running the
engine can result in battery drainage.
Features
• Do not use with vehicles that do not fea-
ture an ACC position.
Touch panel key operation
It is possible to operate the navigation function
and the AV function by using touch panel key.
Rear view camera
Compatible with the memory navi mode
Memory navigation functions are provided with
the hardware. For details, see page 31, “Memory
navi mode.”
With an optional rear view camera, you are able
to use the navigation system as an aid to keep an
eye on trailers, or backing into a tight parking
spot.
14
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
➲ “Playable Discs” ➞ Page 17
Variety of View Modes
Various types of screen display can be selected
for navigation guidance.
CD playback
Music CD/CD-R/CD-RW playback is possible.
➲ “Handling and Care of the Disc” ➞ Page 158
➲ “Playable Discs” ➞ Page 17
MP3 file playback
It is possible to play back MP3 files recorded on
CD-R/-RW/-ROM and DVD-R/-RW/-ROM.
❒ Supply of this navigation system only conveys
a license for private, non-commercial use and
does not convey a licence nor imply any right
to use this product in any commercial (i.e. rev-
enuegenerating) real time broadcasting (ter-
restrial, satellite, cable and/or any other
media), broadcasting/streaming via internet,
intranets and/or other networks or in other
electronic content distribution systems, such
as pay-audio or audio-on-demand applica-
tions. An independent licence for such use is
required. For details, please visit
Wide Variety of Facility Information for
Points of Interest (POI) Search
You can search your destination from all areas.
– Approximately 12 million POIs are included in
this database as of April 2006.
– Some POI information may not be accurate or
may become inaccurate through the passage of
time. Please directly contact the POI to verify the
accuracy of the information about the POI which
appears in this database. POI information is sub-
ject to change without notice.
Auto Reroute Function
http://www.mp3licensing.com.
If you deviate from the set route, the system will
re-calculate the route from that point so that you
remain on track to the destination.
➲ “Handling and Care of the Disc” ➞ Page 158
➲ “Playable Discs” ➞ Page 17
❒ This function may not work in certain areas.
WMA file playback
You can play back WMA files recorded on
CD-R/-RW/-ROM and DVD-R/-RW/-ROM.
Assign an Original Image as a Back-
ground Image
You can store your own pictures on a CD-R/-RW
and DVD-R/-RW in JPEG format and import origi-
nal images in this navigation system. These
imported images can be set as a background
image.
AAC file playback
You can play back AAC files recorded on
CD-R/-RW/-ROM and DVD-R/-RW/-ROM.
®
DivX video file playback
You can play back DivX video files recorded on
CD-R/-RW/-ROM and DVD-R/-RW/-ROM.
❒ Imported original images will be stored in the
memory, but saving cannot be guaranteed
completely. If original image data is deleted,
set the CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW again and
re-import the original image.
NTSC compatibility
This product is NTSC system compatible. When
connecting other components to the product, be
sure components are compatible with the same
video system or else images will not be correctly
reproduced.
DVD-Video playback
It is possible to play back DVD-Video, DVD-R
(video mode) and DVD-RW (video mode).
❒ Remember that use of this system for com-
mercial or public viewing purposes may con-
stitute an infringement on the author’s rights
protected by the Copyright Law.
Auto CD title and MP3/WMA/AAC file
listing
Title lists will automatically be displayed when a
CD TEXT, MP3, WMA or AAC disc is played. This
system provides easy-to-operate audio functions
➲ “Handling and Care of the Disc” ➞ Page 158
15
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
that allow playback simply by selecting an item
from the list.
Multi-aspect
Switching between wide screen, letter box and
panscan display is possible.
®
iPod compatibility
Multi-audio, Multi-subtitle, and Multi-
angle
You can switch between multiple audio systems,
subtitle languages and multiple viewing angles of
a scene recorded on a DVD as desired.
When you use this navigation system with a Pio-
neer iPod cable (CD-I200) (sold separately), you
can control an iPod with Dock connector.
❒ To obtain maximum performance, we recom-
mend that you use the latest version of the
iPod software.
❒ This product incorporates copyright protec-
tion technology that is protected by method
claims of certain U.S. patents and other intel-
lectual property rights owned by Macrovision
Corporation and other rights owners. Use of
this copyright protection technology must be
authorized by Macrovision Corporation, and is
uses only unless otherwise authorized by
Macrovision Corporation. Reverse engineer-
ing or disassembly is prohibited.
❒ iPod is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered in
the U.S. and other countries.
Hands-free phoning
Using Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200) (sold
separately), this unit realizes effortless hands-free
phoning with Bluetooth wireless technology.
Bluetooth audio player compatibility
Using a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200) (sold
separately), you can control a Bluetooth audio
player featuring Bluetooth wireless technology.
Rear entertainment
Video from sources with video can be displayed
on the rear display.
Dolby Digital
When using Pioneer multi-channel processors
that are planned to be compatible with this navi-
gation system, please consult your dealer or
nearest authorized Pioneer Service Station.
Rear view camera ready
You can display what is behind the vehicle if con-
nected to a rear view camera (sold separately).
➲ “Rear view camera” ➞ Page 14
❒ Manufactured under license from
Dolby Laboratories. “Dolby” and the double-D
symbol are trademarks of Dolby Laboratories.
Data communication function with XM
tuner
If you connect the optional XM tuner
(GEX-P10XMT) to the navigation system, you can
use traffic information as a part of the navigation
function. A separate subscription to XM NavTraf-
fic is required.
About DTS sound
Only digital output of DTS audio is possible. If
navigation system’s optical digital outputs are
not connected, DTS audio will not be output, so
select an audio setting other than DTS.
In addition, if you subscribe to XM Audio ser-
vices, you can utilize the XM display featuring sta-
tion logos and category icons, to improve your
XM Audio experience.
➲ “Using XM NavTraffic Information” ➞ Page 59
➲ “Listening to XM Satellite Radio” ➞ Page 96
“DTS” and “DTS Digital Out” are registered trade-
marks of DTS, Inc.
16
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ The broadcast station icons contained on this
disc are based on the data provided by XM
Satellite Radio as of November 2006. Any sub-
sequent changes made by XM Satellite Radio
in the lineup or icon of the broadcast station
in the future may not be supported by the nav-
igation system, and may cause the unit not to
display the correct icons.
Playable Discs
About DVD-Video and CD
DVD and CD discs that display the logos shown
below generally can be played back on this built-
in DVD drive.
DVD-Video
About XM NavTraffic Service and
Pioneer Navigation
❒ XM NavTraffic subscription is required and is
available only in select markets. Check
www.xmnavtraffic.com for service availability,
pricing information, and other details. The
availability of XM NavTraffic data depends on
the ability of the antenna to receive a signal.
The signal may be unavailable if obstructed
(e.g., by buildings, mountains, trees, bridges,
bad weather, etc.). XM NavTraffic data also
may be unavailable or not current if the origi-
nal data source is not providing data (e.g.,
scheduled or unscheduled downtime) or has
not been updated itself or if there is a time lag
between the time the original data source is
updated and when you receive the updated
XM NavTraffic data.
CD
❒
is a trademark of DVD Format/Logo
Licensing Corporation.
❒ It is not possible to play back DVD-Audio
discs. This DVD drive may not be able to play
all discs bearing the marks shown above.
❒ Depending on the amount of data being trans-
mitted in your area, it may take several min-
utes to collect all of the available data.
About AVCHD recorded discs
This unit is not compatible with discs recorded in
AVCHD (Advanced Video Codec High Definition)
format.
Do not insert AVCHD discs. If inserted, the disc
may not be ejected.
❒ The information content depends on the infor-
mation provided by XM NavTraffic Service,
including data refresh and availability timing.
❒ Pioneer does not bear responsibility for the
About Dual layer discs
accuracy of the information transmitted.
The unit cannot play back DVD-R/-RW discs that
are written in Layer Jump Recording mode. For
more information about the writing method, see
the operation manual for the writing device.
❒ Pioneer does not bear responsibility for
changes to information services provided by
XM, such as cancellation of the services or
subscription update.
About DVD Map Disc
You can use discs intended for this navigation
system. Use only discs approved by Pioneer.
❒ Traffic information is not taken into account
when calculating estimated time of arrival
time or travel time for your destination.
➲ For details on other discs ➞ Page 158
17
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The Windows Media™ logo printed on the box
indicates that this unit can play back WMA data.
WMA is short for Windows Media Audio and
refers to an audio compression technology that is
developed by Microsoft Corporation. WMA data
can be encoded by using Windows Media Player
version 7 or later.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trade-
marks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Cor-
poration in the United States and/or other
countries.
DVD-Video disc region numbers
DVD-Video discs that have incompatible region
numbers cannot be played on this DVD drive. The
region number of the player can be found on the
bottom of this product.
The illustration below shows the regions and cor-
responding region numbers.
Notes
• This unit may not operate correctly depending
on the application used to encode WMA files.
• Depending on the version of Windows Media
Player used to encode WMA files, album
names and other text information may not be
correctly displayed.
What the Marks on DVDs Indi-
cate
• There may be a slight delay when starting play-
back of WMA files encoded with image data.
The marks below may be found on DVD disc
labels and packages. They indicate the type of
images and audio recorded on the disc, and the
functions you can use.
About AAC
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and
refers to an audio compression technology stan-
dard used with MPEG 2 and MPEG 4. Several
applications can be used to encode AAC files, but
file formats and extensions differ depending on
the application which is used to encode.
This unit plays back AAC files encoded by
iTunes® version 4.6.
Mark
Meaning
Indicates the number of audio systems.
2
Indicates the number of subtitle lan-
guages.
2
Indicates the number of viewing angles.
3
Indicates the picture size (aspect ratio:
screen width-to-height ratio) type.
16 : 9 LB
❒ iTunes is a trademark of Apple Inc., registered
Indicates the number of the region
where playback is possible.
ALL
1
in the U.S. and other countries.
If the marks other than listed are found on DVD
disc labels and packages, please ask for the DVD
disc supplier for their meaning.
About DivX
About WMA
DivX is a compressed digital video format created
by the DivX® video codec from DivX, Inc. This unit
can play DivX video files recorded on CD-R/RW/
ROM and DVD-R/RW/ROM discs. Keeping the
same terminology as DVD video, individual DivX
video files are called “Titles”. When naming files/
titles on a CD-R/RW or a DVD-R/RW disc prior to
burning, keep in mind that by default they will be
played in alphabetical order.
18
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Official DivX® Certified product Plays all versions
of DivX® video (including DivX® 6) with standard
playback of DivX® media files
one-time activation fee, may apply. Subscription
fee is consumer only. All fees and programming
subject to change. Subscriptions subject to Cus-
tomer Agreement available at xmradio.com. XM
radio service only available in the 48 contiguous
United States and Canada.
❒ DivX, DivX Certified, and associated logos are
trademarks of DivX, Inc. and are used under
license.
© 2007 XM Satellite Radio Inc. All rights reserved.
About the SAT RADIO READY
Logo
The SAT RADIO READY logo printed below the
CD loading slot indicates that the Satellite Radio
Tuner for Pioneer (i. e., XM tuner and Sirius satel-
lite tuner which are sold separately) can be con-
trolled by this navigation system. Please inquire
with your dealer or nearest authorized Pioneer
service station regarding the satellite radio tuner
that can be connected to this navigation system.
For satellite radio tuner operation, please refer to
the Operation Manuals of the navigation system
and satellite radio tuner.
NAVTEQ Traffic™ is a trademark of NAVTEQ.
© 2007 NAVTEQ All rights reserved.
To Protect the LCD Panel and
Screen
❒ Do not allow direct sunlight to fall on the dis-
play when this product is not being used.
Extended exposure to direct sunlight can
result in LCD screen malfunction due to the
resulting high temperatures.
Note:
The system will use direct satellite-to-receiver
broadcasting technology to provide listeners in
their cars and at home with crystal-clear sound
seamlessly from coast to coast. Satellite radio
will create and package over 100 channels of dig-
ital-quality music, news, sports, talk and chil-
dren’s programming.
❒ When using a cellular phone, keep the
antenna of the cellular phone away from the
display to prevent disruption of the video by
the appearance of spots, colored stripes, etc.
❒ To protect the LCD screen from damage, be
sure to touch the touch keys with a finger.
(The stylus is supplied for special calibrations.
Do not use the stylus for normal operations.)
“SAT Radio”, the SAT Radio logo and all related
marks are trademarks of Sirius Satellite Radio
inc., and XM Satellite Radio Inc.
Using force to manually adjust the LCD panel
angle may damage the LCD panel.
About the XM NAVTRAFFIC
Logo
➲ “Adjusting the LCD panel angle” ➞ Page 25
Required $12.95 basic monthly XM radio sub-
scription and XM NavTraffic service subscriptions
sold separately. XM NavTraffic only available in
select markets. Other fees and taxes, including a
19
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Turn the ignition switch OFF.
For Viewing LCD Comfortably
2 Press the RESET button with a pen tip or
other pointed instrument.
RESET button
Due to its construction, the view angle of the LCD
screen is limited. The viewing angle (vertical and
horizontal) can be increased, however, by using
Brightness to adjust the black density of the
video. When using for the first time, adjust the
black density in accordance with the viewing
angle (vertical and horizontal) to adjust for clear
viewing. Dimmer can also be used to adjust the
brightness of the LCD screen itself to suit your
personal preference.
❒ If you have connected other equipment (for
example, Bluetooth adapter) to this navigation
system, be sure to reset that equipment too.
Resetting the Microprocessor
Reset the navigation system to
the initial (factory) setting
• Pressing the RESET button deletes the
contents of the system’s memory.
When you want to erase memorized settings and
return the navigation system to its initial (factory)
settings, carry out the following operations.
1 Turn the engine ON or set the ignition
switch to ACC position.
About the data being deleted
The information is erased by pressing the RESET
button or disconnecting the yellow lead from the
battery (or removing the battery itself). However,
the following items are not erased:
• Sensor learning status and driving status
• Memory areas that were memorized manually
• Areas to avoid
2 Press the RESET button with a pen tip or
other pointed instrument.
❒ Some navigation settings and data are not
erased.
• Registered Locations in “Address Book”
• Data registered in “Emergency Info”
Reset the navigation system
without changing the condition
memory
Pressing the RESET button of the navigation
system lets you reset the microprocessor to its
initial settings without changing the condition
memory.
The microprocessor must be reset under the fol-
lowing conditions:
• Prior to using this product for the first time
after installation.
• If the product fails to operate properly.
• If there appear to be problems with the opera-
tion of the system.
• When changing the combination of the equip-
ment.
• When adding/removing additional products
that connect to the navigation system.
20
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD Map Discs for Your Navigation System
Configuration of data recorded on discs
The map for this navigation system is supplied on two discs: one for the west and the other for the east.
Please set the disc to use according to your destination or current location.
The areas recorded on each disc are as follows:
West area disc
East area disc
❒ Removing the disc and inserting another disc causes the navigation system to automatically restart
and reload the new route. (This automatic “Reroute” operation cannot be canceled.)
Initial Use
If the initial learning is not complete, following screen appears.
1 If a message appears, touch “OK”.
When the navigation system begins running for the first time, the 3D Hybrid Sensor automatically
begins initial learning. Positioning is performed solely by GPS satellites until the 3D Hybrid Sensor
initial learning is complete, so the location of your vehicle may not be very accurate. This is not an
error. When the initial learning is complete, the location of your vehicle can be detected with high
accuracy.
❒ “Shop Demo” is the demonstration used in a store. Do not touch “Shop Demo”.
➲ If an error message appears during initial learning ➞ Page 152
21
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
22
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 1
Basic Operation
Navigation unit
This section gives information about the names of the parts and the main features using the buttons.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
g
f
ae d c b
a
9
a / button
Press to perform manual seek tuning, fast for-
ward, reverse and track search controls.
1 Disc indicator
When a disc is set in navigation system, this indi-
cator lights.
2 LCD panel
3 LCD screen
c PHONE button
Press to display BT-TEL operation screen.
Press and hold to switch the indication of sub
display in the following order:
Present time — No indication — AV source infor-
mation
4 AV button
Press to display the AV operation screen.
5 MAP button
Press to view the map or change view mode.
6 MENU button
Press to display the navigation menu or AV
menu.
➲ “Hands-free Phoning” ➞ Page 105
d Front panel
➲ “Removing the front panel” ➞ Page 26
7 RESET button
e Disc loading slot
➲ “Resetting the Microprocessor” ➞ Page 20
➲ “Inserting/Ejecting a Disc” ➞ Page 24
8 DETACH button
Press to remove the front panel from the display
f Sub Display
unit.
Displays the current time or information about
the AV source that is currently playing.
9 OPEN/CLOSE button
Press to open or close the LCD panel.
Press and hold to display Flap Setup screen.
g VOLUME knob
Turn to adjust the AV (Audio and Video) volume
or press to change the AV source. Press and hold
the VOLUME knob to switch the source to mute.
➲ “Adjusting the LCD panel angle” ➞ Page 25
23
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Flow from Startup to Termina-
tion
Inserting/Ejecting a Disc
Inserting a disc
❒ If the program is not installed, see page
136 and install the program.
1 Insert a disc into the disc loading slot.
1 Start the engine.
The navigation system is also turned on.
After some time, the navigation opening
screen comes on for a few seconds. Then, a
message screen is displayed.
❒ Insert the Pioneer DVD Map Disc to the
disc loading slot.
2 Check the details of the caution message
and touch “OK”.
❒ The DVD drive plays one standard 12-cm or
8-cm (single) disc at a time. Do not use an
adapter when playing 8-cm discs.
❒ Do not insert anything other than a disc
into the disc loading slot.
You can operate the navigation system by
touching keys displayed on the screen.
3 Turn off the vehicle engine.
This navigation system is also turned off.
❒ This product also can be switched off by
turning the ACC (ignition) OFF.
Ejecting a disc
1 Press the EJECT button.
The disc is ejected.
Opening and Closing the LCD
Panel
• Do not close the LCD panel with hands by
force. This may cause malfunction.
• Keep hands and fingers clear of the dis-
play unit when opening, closing, or adjust-
ing the LCD panel. Be especially cautious
of children’s hands and fingers.
The LCD panel will open or close automatically by
turning the ignition switch on or off. You can turn
off the automatic open/close function.
• The automatic open/close function will operate
the display as follows:
— When the ignition switch is turned OFF
while the LCD panel is open, the LCD panel
will close after a few moments.
— When the ignition switch is turned ON
again (or turned to ACC), the LCD panel will
open automatically.
— Removing or attaching the front panel will
automatically close or open the LCD panel.
24
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
➲ Removing the front panel ➞ Page 26
• When the ignition switch is turned OFF after
the LCD panel has been closed, turning the
ignition switch ON again (or turning it to ACC)
will not open the LCD panel. In this case, press
the OPEN/CLOSE button to open the LCD
panel.
• When closing the LCD panel, check to make
sure that it has closed completely. If the LCD
panel has stopped halfway, leaving it like this
could result in damage.
When Flap Setup is displayed during the AV
screen, the current AV operation screen is dis-
played.
❒ If you can hear the LCD panel knocking
against your vehicle’s console or dash-
board, press the button to move the
LCD panel slightly forward.
❒ When adjusting the LCD panel angle, be
sure to press the or button. Man-
ually adjusting the LCD panel by hand may
damage it.
1 Press the OPEN/CLOSE button to close
the LCD panel.
❒ To open the LCD panel, press the OPEN/
CLOSE button again.
Setting the LCD panel
Adjusting the LCD panel angle
1 Press and hold the OPEN/CLOSE button.
❒ The adjusted the LCD panel angle will be
memorized and LCD panel will automati-
cally return to this angle the next time the
LCD panel is opened.
The Flap Setup screen appears.
Setting the slide back function
You can adjust LCD panel slide position to pre-
vent the display from hitting the gearstick of an
automatic vehicle when it is in P (park) position.
2 Press the or button to adjust the
LCD panel to an easily viewable angle.
The LCD panel angle continues changing as
long as you keep pressing and holding the
or button.
❒ Please be careful, as LCD panel will slide
immediately after the setting is turned “On”.
1 Press and hold the OPEN/CLOSE button.
The Flap Setup screen appears.
2 Touch “Flap Set Back”.
Touching “Flap Set Back” switches between
“On” and “Off”.
3 Touch “ESC”.
When Flap Setup is displayed during the
navigation screen, the map screen is dis-
played.
25
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Put the front panel into provided protec-
tive case for safe keeping.
Setting the automatic open
function
When you do not wish the display to open/close
automatically, you can set the automatic open
function to the manual mode.
Attaching the front panel
1 Replace the front panel by holding it
upright to this product and clipping it
securely into the mounting hooks.
1 Press and hold the OPEN/CLOSE button.
The Flap Setup screen appears.
2 Touch “Auto Flap”.
Each touch of the “Auto Flap” changes the
settings as follows:
• Manual — You have to press the OPEN/
CLOSE button to open/close the display
• Auto — The display automatically opens/
closes when power to navigation system is
turned on
Protecting Your Product from
Theft
The front panel can be detached from the display
unit to discourage theft, as described below.
Important:
• Never grip the display and the buttons tightly
or use force when removing or attaching.
• Avoid subjecting the front panel to excessive
shocks.
• Keep the front panel out of direct sunlight and
high temperatures.
• After detaching the front panel, keep it in a
safe place so it is not scratched or damaged.
Removing the front panel
1 Press the DETACH button to remove the
front panel.
2 Gently grip the right side of the front
panel and slowly pull it outward.
Take care not to drop the front panel and pro-
tect it from contact with water or other fluids
to prevent permanent damage.
26
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About NAVI MENU and AV MENU
The methods for displaying the NAVI MENU, used for navigation operations, and the AV MENU, used
for AV operations, are different depending on which screen is currently displayed.
Map screen
NAVI MENU
Press the
MAP button
Press the
MENU button
Press the AV
button or the
VOLUME knob
Press the AV
button or the
VOLUME knob
Press the
MAP button
Touch
“AV MENU”
Touch
“NAVI MENU”
Press the
MENU button
Press the
MENU button
AV operation screen
AV MENU
27
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Basic flow of operation
Basic Navigation
apply the parking brake.
The most basic search function is Address
Search, in which the address is specified and
the destination searched. This section describes
how to use Address Search and the basics of
using the navigation system.
2 Insert the Pioneer DVD Map Disc to
the disc loading slot.
• For safety reasons, you cannot use some of
these basic navigation functions while
your vehicle is in motion. To enable these
functions, you must stop in a safe place
and apply the parking brake (see page 13
Interlock for details).
3 Press the MAP button to display the
map screen.
4 Press the MENU button to display the
NAVI MENU.
5 Touch “Destination” to display
Destination menu.
6 Select the method of searching for
your destination.
7 Enter the information about your desti-
nation.
8 Navigation system calculates the
route to your destination, and then
shows the route on the map.
9 After releasing the parking brake,
drive in accordance with the naviga-
tion guidance, subject to the important
safety instructions noted on page 12 to
14.
28
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 Input the house number and touch “OK”.
How to set your destination by
address
Touch the characters you wish to input.
1 Press the MAP button to display the map
screen.
2 Press the MENU button to display the
NAVI MENU.
3 Touch “Destination” to display
Destination menu.
:
The input text is deleted letter by letter from
the end of the text. Continuing to this will
delete all of the text.
4 Touch “Address Search”.
“Back”:
Returns you to the previous screen.
❒ You may also input a prefix to the house
number.
❒ If the house number you have input is not
found among subsequently selected
“Street” or “City” data, a message appears
saying that the address has not been
found. In that case, try inputting the house
number again.
❒ Touching “OK” with no input allows you to
specify and search a street name or the
name of the city or area first.
5 Touch “Zone code key”.
If the destination is in another zone, this
changes the zone setting.
Zone code key
8 Input the street name.
Touch the letter you wish to input. If the next
screen is not automatically displayed even
though the street name is entered, try touch-
ing “OK”.
6 Touch the zone code of the destination,
then touch “OK”.
Selected zone
Inputted text
The number of applicable candidates
“City”:
Zone code
Touch if you wish to first specify the destination
city or area.
:
The input text is deleted letter by letter from the
end of the text. Continuing to this will delete all of
the text.
29
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“Sym.”:
Touching the or on the scroll bar scrolls you
through the list and allows you to view the
remaining items.
You can input symbols such as “&”and “+”.
“0-9”:
You can input numbers.
“Back”:
If an item cannot be displayed in a single line,
touching the
Returns you to the previous screen.
you to see the whole line.
• Touching the
specifies the selected street
❒ For example, for “Early California Ct”, you can
just enter part of the name, such as “Califor-
nia”.
and streets intersecting it, allowing you to set
an intersection as your destination. This is use-
ful when you don’t know the house number of
your destination or cannot input the house
number of the specified street.
• Touching the
you have selected. (Candidate place names
may appear in the list screen.)
❒ When entering the characters, the unit will
automatically query the database for all possi-
ble options. If there is only one letter that
could possibly follow your entry, that letter will
automatically be entered.
displays a map of the place
➲ “When
appears to the right of the list” ➞
Page 41
Searching your destination after
specifying the name of the city or area
❒ If the selected street has only one matching
location, route calculation starts after press-
ing the item.
You can narrow down the search candidates by
initially specifying the name of the city or area
where your destination is located. Inputting the
name of the city or area then selecting the desti-
nation city or area from the list returns you to the
Street Name input screen. Now input the street
name, select the street from the list, and proceed
to step 9.
❒ A list appears if multiple options exist, select
the desired one from the list, and proceed to
the next step.
If you did not input the house number in Step 7,
the house number input screen comes up after
the “Street” and “City” are determined. You
should now input the house number (perform
Step 5).
❒ If there is more than one place for the house
number input, or if there is no such house
number in that place, a range of house num-
bers are displayed. To start the route calcula-
tion, touch the range within the list you wish
to specify as the destination.
In the selected area, if you touch “City” without
entering the name of the city or area, you can set
the cities or areas that you have searched in the
past from the list. (This function is not available in
the first time and when you have selected an area
that you have never searched before.)
❒ You can also see the destination on the
map by touching the
list.
to the right of the
9 Touch the street from the list.
➲ “When
➞ Page 41
appears to the right of the list”
❒ If you press the MENU button, the calcula-
tion is canceled.
❒ After the route calculation, the system
start storing the map data around the
route for “Memory navi mode”.
Scroll bar
30
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ When performing a destination search
with the route already set, select whether
to regard the specified area as your desti-
nation and search for a new route, or
search for a route via that area.
How to view the map screen
This section describes only the items that are dis-
played on the map screen.
➲ Details of the map screen ➞ Page 37
➲ Adding way points to the route ➞ Page 48
❒ Once searched for, the location is auto-
matically stored in the “Destination His-
tory”.
➲ “Registering a previous location in the
Address Book” ➞ Page 56
(1)
(4)
voice information.
(1) Current location
Your navigation system gives you the follow-
ing information with the timing adjusted to
the speed of your vehicle:
• Distance to the next turning point
• Direction of travel
(2) Distance to the destination
(3) Estimated time of arrival (or travel time to
your destination)
• Road number of the freeway
• Way point (If this is set)
➲ “Memory Navi Mode” ➞ Page 138
• Your destination
➲ Searching for another route ➞ Page 48
➲ “Canceling the Route Guidance” ➞
Memory navi mode
While the DVD Map Disc is inserted, you can
store the map data into the internal memory of
the navigation system. If the DVD Map Disc is
removed from the navigation system after storing
is completed, navigation is performed using the
data in the memory (memory navi mode). When
disappears, memory navi mode is ready. You
can now remove the DVD Map Disc. In the mem-
ory navi mode, you can play a music CD or DVD-
Video on the navigation system while navigating
at the same time. The operation automatically
switches to the memory navi mode when the
DVD Map Disc is removed from the navigation
system.
Page 46
❒ Touching the
allows you to hear the
information again.
❒ To adjust the navigation volume, go to the
NAVI MENU.
➲ Navigation volume adjustment ➞ Page 73
❒ If you stop at a gas station or a restaurant dur-
ing the route guidance, your navigation sys-
tem remembers your destination and route
information. When you start the engine and
get back on the road, route guidance
resumes.
Some functions are restricted and different from
the navigation using the DVD Map Disc (DVD
navi mode). If you want to use these functions,
please insert the DVD Map Disc again.
During the memory navi mode, navigation is per-
formed only using the data read into the memory.
❒ You may need to insert the DVD Map Disc and
store new data in the memory during naviga-
tion operation, such as when the destination
is far away. The memory navi mode uses the
following map data to perform navigation.
➲ Refer to page 138 for more detail information.
31
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ Touch “TRAFFIC” to switch to XM or SIR-
IUS screen that memorized traffic channel.
➲ “Using the direct traffic announcement
function” ➞ Page 99, 103
Basic AV Source
This section describes basic AV operations, such
as adjusting the volume, switching the source
and stopping the source, using CD operations as
an example.
❒ Sources that are not connected to the naviga-
tion system, sources that are busy reading a
disc or magazine, and sources with incom-
plete settings cannot be used.
Selecting an AV source
❒ The term “external unit” refers to a Pioneer
product (such as one available in the future)
that, although incompatible as a source,
enables control of basic functions by the navi-
gation system. Two external units can be con-
trolled by the navigation system. When two
external units are connected, the navigation
system allocates them to external unit 1 or
external unit 2.
1 Press the VOLUME knob (or AV button) to
switch to the AV operation screen.
❒ When the “Antenna Control” mode is set to
or turned off by following the instructions
below.
— Change the source from radio (AM or FM)
to another source.
2 Press the MENU button to change to the
AV MENU.
3 Touch the source icon to select the
desired source in the AV Source screen.
— Turn the source off.
— Turn off the ignition switch (ACC OFF).
If the “Antenna Control” mode is set to
“Power”, the vehicle’s antenna can be stowed
or turned off only when the ACC is set to
“OFF”.
➲ “Antenna Control” ➞ Page 132
❒ Also, press the VOLUME knob repeatedly
when the AV operation screen is displayed to
switch between sources:
Adjusting the volume
“DISC” [CD, ROM, DVD-V, DivX] (built-in DVD
drive) — “RADIO” (tuner) — “iPod” (iPod) —
phone) — “BT-AUDIO” (Bluetooth Audio) —
“M-CD” (multi-CD player) — “M-DVD” (multi-
DVD player) — “AV-1” (video input1) — “AV-
2” (video input2) — “EXT-1” (external unit 1)
— “EXT-2” (external unit 2) — “OFF” (source
off)
1 Use the VOLUME knob to adjust the audio
sound level.
to increase or decrease the volume.
❒ To adjust the navigation volume (voice
guidance), access “Volume” in the NAVI
MENU.
➲ Navigation volume adjustment ➞ Page 73
❒ Touch “OFF” to switch the source to OFF.
❒ Touch “REAR SCREEN” to select the source
for Rear display.
➲ “Selecting the video for “Rear display”” ➞
Page 130
32
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Press the VOLUME knob (or AV button) to
switch the Audio screen.
Turning the source off
1 Press the VOLUME knob (or AV button) to
switch to the AV operation screen.
AV MENU.
3 Touch “OFF” in the AV Source screen.
❒ Press and hold the VOLUME knob to switch
the source to mute.
Current track information
How to listen to a CD
You can listen to an audio CD by removing the
DVD Map Disc from the navigation system.
➲ About Memory Navigation ➞ “Memory navi
mode” on page 31. (For details, see page 138.)
1 Press the EJECT button to remove the
DVD Map Disc.
4 Rotate the VOLUME knob to adjust the
volume.
5 Touch or to select a track you
want to listen to.
Information of the track being played
2 Insert the CD to the disc loading slot.
The audio CD set in the navigation system is
played.
You can also select a track by pressing the
or button on the hardware.
6 To fast forward or rewind, keep touching
or .
You can also perform fast rewind/fast forward
by holding the or button on the hard-
ware.
33
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
7 To hide the touch key, touch “Hide”.
Information of the Audio source being played
Distance to the guidance point
Current direction of travel
Next direction of travel
❒ If you touch the screen, the touch panel
keys are displayed again.
Available buttons
The availability of a specific button or functional-
ity is indicated by its color. Depending on the sta-
tus of your vehicle, some buttons will be
available, while others will not be.
(e.g. “Address Search”)
Black touch key:
The button is operable.
Gray touch key with white letters:
The function is not available during memory navi
mode. Or, the function is not available for areas
not stored on the disc.
Touching this button activates a message indicat-
ing that the function is not available.
Gray touch key with gray letters:
The function is not available (e.g., operation is
prohibited while driving).
34
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 2
Navigation Menu and Map Display
This section describes the basic navigation oper-
ations, including how to display the NAVI MENU
and how to use the shortcut menu and the map
screen.
➲ Specifying the address and searching the des-
tination ➞ Page 28
➲ Other search methods ➞ Page 43 to 45
Info/Traffic menu
How to Use Menu Screens
There are two types of navigation menu: the
“NAVI MENU” and the “Shortcut menu”.
❒ The functions that cannot be used during the
memory navi mode are indicated in gray with
black letters. If you want to use such func-
tions, insert the DVD Map Disc.
Use this menu to check traffic information mainly
using the GEX-P10XMT*.
❒ “Traffic On Route”, “Traffic Events”, “Traf-
fic Flow”, “Stock Info”, “Set My Favorites”,
and “My Favorites” can be used only when
the GEX-P10XMT* is connected to the naviga-
NAVI MENU
Use this menu for basic operation of your naviga-
tion system.
1 With the map displayed, press the MENU
button.
GEX-P10XMT*:
separately). Traffic information only available for
cities where information is provided by XM
NavTraffic service. Active subscription to XM
NavTraffic required to receive traffic information
on the navigation system.
2 To change to the menu you want to use,
touch the name of the menu displayed at
the top of the screen.
The NAVI MENU is divided into four sub-
menus: “Destination”, “Info/Traffic”,
“Route Options”, “Settings”.
❒ Touch “AV MENU” changes to the AV
operation screen.
❒ ”Traffic On Route”, “Traffic Events”, and
“Traffic Flow” can only be used in DVD navi
mode.
➲ AV operation screen ➞ Page 79
➲ Confirming traffic information ➞ Page 59
3 If you want to return to the map, press the
MENU button.
➲ Registering information for emergencies ➞
Page 65
Destination menu
Select the destination search method. The route
also can be canceled from this menu.
35
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Route Options menu
1 When the map is displayed, briefly touch
any part of the map.
If you continue to touch the map, it will start
scrolling.
Used to specify the conditions for setting the
route to the destination.
➲ Setting the Route Options ➞ Page 52
Shortcut menu
❒ “Edit Current Route”, “View Current
Route” and “Recalculate” can be used when
the route is set.
: Destination*
Displayed when the map is scrolled. Set the
route to the place specified with the scroll cur-
sor.
Settings menu
Page 41
: Change Route*
item can be selected only during route guid-
ance. You can add changes to your route and
check it.
Set the navigation functions so they can be used
easily.
➲ “Recalculating the route to the destination
using the Route Options menu” ➞ Page 48
➲ “Recalculating a specified distance in the
route ahead of your current position” ➞
Page 48
➲ “Checking the Set Route” ➞ Page 46
➲ “Canceling the Route Guidance” ➞
Page 46
➲ Settings menu ➞ Chapter 5
Shortcut menu
Shortcuts allow you to perform various tasks,
such as route calculation for the location indi-
cated by the scroll cursor or registering a location
in the Address Book, faster than using the NAVI
MENU.
➲ “Skipping a way point” ➞ Page 49
❒ The shortcuts displayed onscreen can be
changed. The shortcuts described here are
those that can be selected with the system as
default setting.
: Vicinity Search
Select a location with the scroll cursor.
Nearby POIs (Points Of Interest) will also be
found.
❒ Items marked with an asterisk (*) cannot be
➲ Searching the facilities surrounding a cer-
tain place ➞ Page 44
removed from the shortcut menu.
➲ Changing a shortcut ➞ Page 74
: Registration
Registers the location indicated by the scroll
cursor to Address Book.
❒ Touching “Registration” and selecting
“Save” allows you to register the location
to Address Book.
➲ Registering a place ➞ Page 56
36
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ If the mode is selected by pressing the
MAP button, the screen automatically
switches to the selected map display mode
after 4 seconds.
: Volume Setting
The sound volume for the navigation can be
set.
➲ Setting the guidance volume ➞ Page 73
: Menu Close
How to view the map of the cur-
rent location
Hides the shortcut menu.
Map View
Displays the standard map.
How to Use the Map
Most of the information provided by your naviga-
tion system can be seen on the map. You need to
get to know how the information that appears on
the map.
(1)
(10) (8)
(2)
(7)
(16)
(4)
Switching the current position
screen display mode
(11)
There are four types of map display and two addi-
tional view modes.
(5)
(12)(3) (9)(17)(6)
• Map View
• Driver’s View
Driver’s View
Displays the map from the driver’s viewpoint.
• Guide View (during route guidance only)
• Route View (during route guidance only)
• Vehicle Dynamics
(1)
(10) (8)
• Rear View (Only possible when the “Camera”
is set to “On”.)
(2)
(7)
(15)
❒ If you deviate from the route when the view
mode is Route View or Guide View and
enter a street not recorded on the disc, the
screen changes to Map View. When you
return to the route, the screen returns to the
original view and resumes route guidance.
(16)
(4)
(11)
(3)
(12)
(5)
(9)(17)(6)
1 Press the MAP button to display a map of
the area around your current position.
• In Driver’s View, a small gauge with no
scale is depicted, but is not intended to be
used as a speedometer. Use the actual
speedometer of your vehicle to confirm
speed.
2 Press the MAP button again.
3 Touch the mode name or press the MAP
button to select the mode you want to dis-
play.
37
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Guide View
Overlays two arrows onto the standard map
(“Map View”).
Rear View
Rear view image is displayed on of the screen.
(1)
(10) (8)
(15)
(2)
(7)
(15)
(16)
(4)
(11)
❒ If you touch the screen briefly, the screen
changes Map View with shortcut menu. If
you close the shortcut menu the screen
returns to Rear View.
(5)
(12) (3) (9) (17)(6)
Route View
❒ If the “Camera” is set to “Off”, the rear view
Displays the name of the street you will travel
image is not displayed. Please set it to “On”.
along next and an arrow indicating the direction
of travel.
➲ Camera setting ➞ Page 131
❒ When using a camera set to turn ON/OFF in
conjunction with the reverse signal, no cam-
era images will be displayed in rear view mode
while you are moving forward.
(1)
(10) (8)
(2)
(7)
(15)
❒ To use “Rear View”, the camera must be set
to always remain on. In that case, you should
ask the camera maker or dealer whether the
camera’s functions or longevity would be
affected.
(16)
(13)
(3)
(4)
(11)
(6)
(17)
(5)
(9) (12)
❒ Rear View can be displayed at all times (e.g.
when monitoring an attached trailer) as a split
screen where map information is partially dis-
played.
Vehicle Dynamics Display
Indicates the status of your vehicle.
Please beware that in this setting, camera
image is not resized to fit to screen, and that a
portion of camera image may not be viewable.
Enlarged map of the intersection
menu is “On”, an enlarged map of the intersec-
tion appears.
• In the Vehicle Dynamics Display mode,
the speedometer display may show a dif-
ferent speed than your vehicle’s actual
speedometer, because your unit measures
speed in a different way.
❒ You can change the items indicated on the left
(14)
(13)
and right meters.
➲ Setting the Vehicle Dynamics Display ➞
Page 69
38
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ The system cannot be changed to an enlarged
set, the distance to the destination and the dis-
tance to the next way point are switched.
intersection map in the following mode.
—Driver’s View
—Vehicle Dynamics
(5) Name of the street your vehicle is travel-
ing along (or City Name, etc.)
Display during freeway driving
(6) Compass
In certain locations of the freeway, lane informa-
The red arrow indicates north. If the scale is less
tion is available, indicating the recommended
lane to be in to easily maneuver the next guid-
ance.
than 25 mi (50 km), touching the map changes
the direction that it is displayed in (north up/
heading up). When the scale of the map is
greater than 25 mi (50 km), it is fixed to “north
up”.
(18)
Heading up:
The map display always shows the vehicle’s
direction as proceeding toward the top of the
screen.
North up:
The map display always has north at the top of
the screen.
While driving on the freeway, freeway exit num-
bers and freeway signs may be displayed when in
the vicinity of interchanges and exits.
(7) Zoom in/Zoom out
Touch to change the map’s scale.
(19)
(20)
➲ “Changing the scale of the map” ➞ Page 40
(8) Map scale
The scale of the map is indicated by distance.
(9) TRAFFIC icon
This appears when an XM tuner (GEX-P10XMT,
sold separately) is connected, and traffic informa-
tion is received.
(10) Current time
Display items
(11) Estimated time of arrival (or travel time
to your destination)*
Guidance point*
The next guidance point (next turning point, etc.)
is shown by a yellow flag.
The display alternates by pressing it.
The estimated time of arrival is automatically cal-
culated from the Average Speed set and the
actual average speed.
Destination*
A checker-flag indicates your destination.
(12) Tracking mark
(1) Name of the street to be used (or next
guidance point)*
The tracking mark shows the route your vehicle
has traveled with dots.
(2) Distance to the guidance point*
Touch to access the next information.
➲ Select the tracking setting ➞ Page 75
(13) Map of your surroundings (Side map)
Touching the map briefly shows the shortcut
(3) Current location
The current location of your vehicle. The tip of the
menu, while touching longer changes the map to
Scroll mode.
triangular mark indicates your heading and the
display moves automatically as you drive.
➲ “Moving the map to the location you want to
(4) Distance to the destination (or distance to
way point)*
If way points are set, the display changes with
see” ➞ Page 40
each touch. When two or more way points are
39
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(14) Distance to a turning point*
Displayed on the enlarged intersection map. The
green bar gets shorter as your vehicle
approaches a turning point.
(15) Next direction of travel*
When you approach a guidance point, it appears
green.
Direct scale key
(16) Direction line*
The direction towards your destination (or scroll
cursor) is indicated with a straight line.
❒ The icon of a registered location and the traf-
fic information icons are displayed when the
map scale is 10 miles (20 km) or lower.
(17) Memory navi indicator
➲ About memory navi indicator ➞ Page 139
❒ POI icons and the line for traffic congestion
and traffic flow are displayed when the map
scale is 0.75 mile (1 km) or lower.
(18) Lane information*
Lane information is displayed the first time there
is a voice guidance on your route. When the guid-
ance screen is displayed near an interchange or
exit, the lane information disappears.
Moving the map to the location
you want to see
If you touch the display briefly, the shortcut menu
appears.
(19) Freeway signs*
These show the road number and give directional
information.
Touching anywhere on the map for at least 2 sec-
onds changes the map to Scroll mode and the
map begins scrolling in the direction you
touched. The scrolling stops when you release
your finger from the screen. At this time, the
scroll cursor appears at the center of the screen.
Also a line connecting between the current loca-
tion and scroll cursor appears.
(20) Freeway exit information*
Displays the freeway exit.
❒ Information with the mark (*) appears only
when the route is set.
❒ Depending on the conditions and settings,
some items may not be displayed.
Pressing the MAP button returns you to the map
of your surroundings.
Changing the scale of the map
Touching
scale. Touch and holding
or
allows you to change the map
or allows you to
❒ Touch the area close to the center of the
screen to scroll slowly. Touch near the sides
of the screen to scroll quickly.
change the scale in smaller step within a range of
25 yards to 1000 miles (25 meters to 2000 kilom-
eters). When the view mode is set to Map View
or Guide View, “Direct scale key” is displayed.
Touching “Direct scale key” changes the map to
the selected scale directly.
(3)
(1) (2)
❒ In memory navi mode and/or when traversing
an area not stored on the disc, selection of the
scales is limited.
(5)
(4)
(1) Scroll location
The position of the scroll cursor shows the loca-
tion selected on the current map.
40
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ When the scale is 0.25 mi (200 m) or lower,
the road appears light blue in the vicinity of
the scroll cursor.
3 Touch “Back”.
You are returned to the previous display.
❒ In the memory navi mode, you can only see
detailed information for registered points
(when available).
(2) Direction line
The direction towards the scroll cursor is indi-
cated with a straight line.
Finding a destination on the map
(3) Distance from the current location
The distance in a straight line between the loca-
tion indicated by the scroll cursor and your cur-
rent location.
If you search the location you want to visit by
in the Shortcut
menu to specify your destination on the map.
1 Press the MAP button to access the map
screen.
(4) The street name, city name, area name
and other information for this location.
(The displayed information varies according to
2 Touch the map for at least 2 seconds.
the scale.)
The map display changes to Scroll mode.
Touching the
on the right displays hidden text.
3 Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor
to the place you want to make your desti-
nation.
➲ Displaying information on the specified loca-
tion ➞ Page 41
(5) Shortcut menu
➲ Moving the map to view the part you want
to see ➞ Page 40
➲ How to use shortcut menu ➞ Page 36
Viewing the information of a specified
location
4 Touch
.
An icon appears at registered places (home loca-
tion, specific places, address book entries) and
places where there is a POI icon or traffic infor-
mation icon. Place the scroll cursor over the icon
to view detailed information.
When
list
appears to the right of the
You can also set a destination by touching
the right of the destination list such as the
to
Address Book. Touch “OK” to confirm. The loca-
tion indicated by the scroll cursor will be set as a
destination.
1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor
to the icon you want to view.
2 Touch
.
Scroll:
The map display changes to with Shortcut menu.
If you touch anywhere on the map, the map dis-
play changes to Scroll mode.
Information for a specified location appears.
The displayed information varies according to
the location. (There may be no information for
that location.)
➲ Shortcut menu ➞ Page 36
➲ Registering places ➞ Page 55
➲ “Displaying Certain POI on the Map” ➞
Page 50
➲ “Confirming traffic information on the
map” ➞ Page 60
41
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
42
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 3
Setting a Route to Your Destination
Searching for Points of Interest
(POI)
• For safety reasons, these route-setting
functions are not available while your
vehicle is in motion. To enable these func-
tions, you must stop in a safe place and
put on the parking brake before setting
your route (see page 13 Interlock for
details).
1 Touch “Destination” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “POI Search”.
2 Touch the zone code key of the destina-
tion and touch “OK”.
➲ Selecting the zone where you want to
search ➞ Page 29
❒ Some information on traffic regulations
depends on the time when the route calcula-
tion is performed. Thus, the information may
not correspond with a certain traffic regula-
tion when your vehicle actually passes the
location. Also, the information on the traffic
regulations provided will be for a passenger
vehicle, and not for a truck or other delivery
vehicles. Always follow the actual traffic regu-
lations when driving.
3 Touch “Category”.
Category
“Name”:
❒ If you press the MENU button during route
calculation, the calculation is canceled and
the map display appears.
Touch if you wish to first specify the POI
Name.
“City”:
❒ Inserting the DVD Map Disc will cause a
forced reroute. (This rerouting cannot be can-
celed.)
Touch if you wish to first specify the destina-
tion city or area.
4 Touch the desired category.
Finding Your Destination by
Selecting the Type of Facility
Information about various facilities (Points Of
Interest - POI), such as gas stations, amusement
parks or restaurants, is available. By selecting the
category (or entering the POI Name), you can
search for a POI.
If the category is not sub-divided into more
detailed categories, the list will not be dis-
played. Proceed to Step 6.
5 Touch the subcategory.
6 Input the name of the POI.
If the list does not automatically appear when
the name of the POI has been entered, try
touching “OK”.
43
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
“City”:
❒ If you want to search with more detailed
categories, touch . When the subcate-
Touch to specify the destination city or area.
❒ If less than six POIs in a subcategory are
available, the screen for inputting the POI
name is skipped. Please proceed to Step 7.
gory list appears, touch the item and touch
“Back”. When only a few types of the
detailed categories are selected, blue
check marks will appear.
7 Touch POI for your destination.
❒ You can select from the detailed category
for up to 100 items.
❒ Touching
displays a map of the sur-
roundings of the selected POI.
3 Touch “OK”.
➲ “When
➞ Page 41
appears to the right of the list”
Names of POIs and their distance from your
current location appear. They are listed in
order from nearest to farthest.
Finding a POI in your surround-
ings
You can search for Points Of Interest in your sur-
roundings on the map. Use it to find a POI to visit
during a journey.
1 Touch “Destination” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Vicinity Search”.
Distance to the facility
2 Touch the desired category.
Category
❒ When you touch
specified location are shown on a map.
➲ “When appears to the right of the list”
➞ Page 41
, the POIs around the
❒ Searching range is approximately 10 miles
(16 km) square from the current location.
Searching the facilities around
the scroll cursor
The selected category will have a red check
mark.
1 Scroll the map and move the scroll cursor
to the place where you want to search for
POI.
OK:
Starts searching.
Back:
Returns to the previous screen.
Set:
Display the screen for registering POI short-
cuts.
➲ Register POI shortcut ➞ Page 51
❒ If you touch one of the POI shortcuts
(e.g. ), you can start searching POI
directly for the selected category on the
POI shortcut.
❒ If you want to search for facilities by using
both marked category and POI shortcuts,
select some categories in the list and then
touch the POI shortcut to start searching.
2 Touch
.
See Step 2 of “Finding a POI in your surround-
ings” for the following operations.
➲ “Finding a POI in your surroundings” ➞
Page 44
❒ This can be used when setting the Vicinity
Search icon to display as a shortcut on the
map screen.
➲ Changing Shortcut ➞ Page 74
❒ The distance indicated in the search result
is the distance from the scroll cursor to the
facility.
44
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ The bottom icons are for shortcuts to your
favorite categories. Touching a shortcut
icon displays a list of the facilities in the
category.
❒ “Vicinity Search” in the NAVI MENU
searches your surroundings. On the other
and then touch “Telephone Search”.
2 Input a telephone number.
❒ If there is more than one place for the
number input, a list of those places is dis-
played. Touch the item you want in the list
and proceed to step 3.
hand, when using
in the Shortcut
menu (➞ Page 36), the area around the
3 If the displayed place is satisfactory,
touch “OK”.
scroll cursor will be searched.
Touching “Scroll” changes the destination.
➲ Searching the destination by map ➞
Page 41
Setting an Entrance or Exit of a
Freeway as Your Destination
You can set the entrance or exit of a freeway as
your destination.
Route Calculation to Your Home
Location
1 Touch “Destination” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Freeway Search”.
If your home location is registered, the route
home can be calculated by a single touch of the
touch key from the NAVI MENU. Also, you can
register one location, such as your workplace, as
your favorite location, and the route is calculated
in a similar way.
2 Touch the zone code key of the destina-
tion and touch “OK”.
3 Enter the name of the freeway and touch
“OK”.
4 Touch the freeway.
1 Touch “Destination” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Return Home” or “Go to”.
The display for selecting your destination to
the entrance or to the exit of the freeway
appears.
➲ “Registering your home and your favorite loca-
tion” ➞ Page 55
5 Touch “Entrance” or “Exit”.
The list of entrances to, or exits from, the
selected freeway appears.
Selecting Destination from the
Destination History and Address
Book
6 Touch your destination.
❒ You can also see the destination by touch-
Any place that has been searched before is
stored in the “Destination History”. Places that
you have registered manually, such as your
home, are stored in the “Address Book”. Simply
select the place you want to go to from the list
and a route to that place will be calculated.
ing the
➲ “When
on the right of the list.
appears to the right of the list”
➞ Page 41
Searching for Your Destination
by Specifying the Telephone
Number
➲ For information on the Address Book ➞
Chapter 4
If you know the telephone number of your desti-
nation, you can quickly search for your destina-
tion by specifying the telephone number.
➲ For information on the Destination History
➞ Chapter 4
45
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Touch “Destination” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Address Book” or “Desti-
nation History”.
Checking the Set Route
You can check information about the route
tion.
You can select from the following methods:
checking the passing streets with a list, checking
the shape of the route by scrolling the map along
the route, and checking the entire distance of the
route in a single screen.
Checking the set route with the
map
Route calculation starts.
❒ You can also see the destination by touch-
ing
on the right of the list.
1 Touch “Route Options” in the NAVI
MENU, then touch “View Current Route”.
❒ “View Current Route” is active only when
the route is set.
➲ “When
appears to the right of the list”
➞ Page 41
Canceling the Route Guidance
❒ You can also see the location by touching
the on the right of the list.
If you no longer need to travel to your destination
or if you want to change your destination, follow
the steps below to cancel the route guidance.
2 Touch “Scroll”.
The screen to selecting the point to start
scrolling appears.
1 Touch “Destination” in the NAVI MENU,
then touch “Cancel Route”.
3 Touch the point to start scrolling.
(1) (3) (2)
The message confirming whether to cancel
the current route appears.
2 Touch “Yes (all)”.
You can select the following items:
(1) Starting Point
(2) Way Point (If this is set)
(3) Destination
The current route is deleted, and a map of
your surroundings reappears.
Yes (one):
Route is recalculated by canceling the
selected way point.
❒ If there are multiple way points, selecting
“Way Point” displays a list of the way
points on the route. Touch the place you
want to start scrolling from and proceed to
step 4.
No:
Returns to the previous display without delet-
ing the route.
❒ You can also cancel the route using the
Change Route in the shortcut menu.
4 Touch
To continue scrolling after you release your
finger, touch and hold or
or
to scroll the map.
.
If necessary, the scale of the map can be
changed.
46
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 Touch “Back”.
❒ When a long distance route is calculated,
your navigation system may not be able to
list all the roads. (In this case, the remain-
ing roads will be shown in the list as you
drive on.)
Scroll Cursor
Current Route
Checking the entire route over-
view
You can check the entire shape of the current
route.
Map:
The scroll screen is displayed.
➲ “When appears to the right of the list”
➞ Page 41
❒ When View Current Route is selected dur-
ing the memory navi mode, the information is
displayed up to the location where the route is
in memory.
5 Touch “Back”.
You can return to the previous display.
1 After touching “Route Options” in the
NAVI MENU, touch “View Current
Route”.
Checking the set route by text
This function is not available if your vehicle has
deviated from the set route.
❒ “View Current Route” is active only when
the route is set.
❒ You can also see the location by touching
on the right of the list.
❒ When Profile is selected during the memory
navi mode, information is displayed up to the
location where the route is stored in memory.
1 Touch “Route Options” in the NAVI
MENU, then touch “View Current Route”.
❒ “View Current Route” is active only when
the route is set.
2 Touch “Overview”.
A map of the whole route up to the destination
is displayed.
❒ You can also check the overview by using
the shortcut menu if “Whole Route Over-
view” is selected on the “Short-Cut
Selection”.
❒ You can also see the location by touching
on the right of the list.
2 Touch “Profile”.
shortcut menu
You can also check the information about the set
route from the shortcut menu.
3 Check the contents on the display.
Scroll the list as necessary.
Name of the streets you are driving through
1 Touch the map screen.
The Shortcut menu appears.
2 Touch
.
3 Touch “Route Profile” or “Route Scroll”.
➲ “Route Profile” ➞ Page 47 (Step 3 and 4)
➲ “Route Scroll” ➞ Page 46 (Step 3 and 4)
Driving distance
4 Touch “Back”.
You can return to the previous display.
47
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Recalculating the Route to Your
Destination
Editing Way Points to the Cur-
rent Route
You can set the length of the area, avoid just a
certain area, or you can even search a new route
from the current location to your destination.
You can select way points (locations you want to
visit on the way to your destination) and you can
recalculate the route to pass through these loca-
tions.
Recalculating the route to the
destination using the Route
Options menu
Editing a way point
Up to 5 way points are selected, and selected
points can be sorted automatically or manually.
1 Touch “Route Options” in the NAVI
MENU, and then touch “Recalculate”.
This option automatically searches the route
to the destination again.
❒ “Edit Current Route” is active only when the
route is set.
1 Touch “Route Options” in the NAVI
MENU, and then touch “Edit Current
Route”.
❒ “Recalculate” is active only when the
route is set.
❒ You can also recalculate (reroute) your
2 Select editing method.
route using the
shortcut menu.
Change Route in the
Recalculating a specified dis-
tance in the route ahead of your
current position
1 Touch the map screen.
❒ You can also see the location by touching
on the right of the list.
The Shortcut menu appears.
Add:
2 Touch
.
Switch the display to search for points. After
searching for a point, display it on a map, then
touch “OK” to add to the way points. (You can
add up to five way points in total.)
Delete:
3 Touch the distance from the list.
You can delete way points from the list.
(You can delete way points successively.)
Sort:
Touch to display a screen listing the way
points. Touching
or
on the left of the
Detour distance
list allows you to sort the way points manually.
Searches detours for a specified distance in
the route ahead of your current position. After
the route is calculated, the map screen shows
your surroundings and route guidance is
resumed.
48
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Automatic:
Setting Areas to Avoid
You can sort the destination and way points
automatically. The system will show the near-
est way point (distance in a straight line) from
the current location as way point 1, and sort
the other points (including your destination)
in order of distance from your current loca-
tion.
If you register Areas to Avoid, such as crowded
intersections or congested areas, routes can be
calculated that avoid those areas.
❒ An area not stored on the disc cannot be set
as an Area to Avoid.
Original:
Returns to the original order.
Registering an area to avoid
This section describes how to register an Area to
Avoid for the first time. You can register up to five
Areas to Avoid.
Select from manual order, “Automatic” or
“Original” and touch “Done” to start the
route search.
1 Touch “Route Options” in the NAVI
MENU, then touch “Designate Areas to
Avoid”.
3 Touch “Done”.
❒ If you set a way point(s) in the route to your
destination, the route up to the next way
point will appear light green. The rest of
the route will be light blue.
2 Touch “Yes”.
3 Select one of the items shown in “New
Area”.
Skipping a way point
If the points are set, the next way point along the
route can be skipped.
When registering for the first time, any item
on the list is shown as “New Area”.
1 Touch the map screen.
The Shortcut menu appears.
2 Touch
.
3 Touch “Skip Way Point”.
A message asking whether you want to skip
the next way point appears.
4 Select the place to register and display
the map.
➲ Address Search ➞ Page 28
➲ Searching places to register ➞ Page 43 to
45
Once a search is complete, a map with the
specified location at its center appears.
❒ If you select the “Map Search”, move the
scroll cursor to the place you want to set
and touch “OK”.
4 Touch “Yes”.
A new route to your destination through all
the remaining way points, except for the
skipped way point, is calculated.
5 Change the map scale and decide the size
of the Area to Avoid.
The Area to avoid is enclosed in a red frame.
You can also change the map scale though
the maximum map scale for registering Areas
to Avoid is 0.1 mile (100 m).
49
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Scroll the map, adjust the position of the
red frame, and touch “OK”.
Displaying Certain POI on the
Map
POI in a certain category can be shown on the
map, and you can check the location on the dis-
play.
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
then touch “Overlay POI”.
If you want to stop registration, touch “Back”.
2 Touch the category you want to display.
The selected item is marked. If you want to
select other categories, repeat this step.
❒ If you want to display more detailed cate-
❒ Depending on the setting of route search con-
ditions, you may not be able to avoid the spec-
ified areas. A confirmation message is
displayed on the screen at this time.
gories, touch
. When the subcategory
➲ Information on route calculation conditions ➞
list appears, touch the item you want to
display and touch “Back”.
Page 53
❒ When some sub-categories are selected,
the corresponding category is marked
blue. When all the sub-categories within a
category are selected, that category is
marked red.
❒ You can use up to 100 categories of the
detailed categories for “Overlay POI”
❒ If you touch one of the POI shortcuts (e.g.
), you can start searching for POI
directly in the selected category on the POI
shortcut.
Changing or deleting an area to
avoid
You can subsequently change/rename/delete an
Area to Avoid.
1 Touch “Route Options” in the NAVI
MENU, then touch “Designate Areas to
Avoid”.
2 Select the area you want to change or
delete.
3 Press the “MAP” button.
POI’s in the selected category appear on the
map.
3 Select the desired operation.
menu if “Overlay POI” is selected on the
“Short-Cut Selection”.
Rename:
Changes the name. Enter the new name and
touch “OK”. This returns you to the Route
Options menu.
Change:
A specified area can be changed. For the next
steps, see Step 3 in the “Registering an area
to avoid” above.
Delete:
Delete the selected Area to Avoid.
50
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Touch subcategory.
The selected category is added to the list of
POI.
Registering/deleting POI Short-
cuts
When registering another icon, repeat steps 3
through 5.
You can register up to six shortcuts to your favor-
ite POI. You can also change or delete the regis-
tered shortcuts.
❒ You can register a POI shortcut by touching
“Overlay POI” under “Info/Traffic” in the
NAVI MENU, or by touching the icons such as
Registering a POI shortcut
and
on the map. The steps for registra-
1 Touch “Destination” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Vicinity Search”.
tion are the same as described above.
Deleting a POI shortcut
2 Touch “Set”.
1 Touch “Destination” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Vicinity Search”.
❒ You can also touch
in the shortcut
menu or “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
then touch “Overlay POI”.
2 Touch “Set”.
Displays a list of already registered POI short-
cuts.
3 Touch “Delete”.
Displays a list of already registered POI short-
cuts.
3 Touch “Add”.
4 Touch the category to be deleted.
A red check appears on the selected shortcut.
All:
A red check will appear on all registered cate-
gories.
5 Touch “Delete”.
Displays a POI category list.
Deletes the selected shortcut from the list.
4 Touch category or
.
Touching a category adds that category to the
shortcuts. After touching , please proceed
to Step 5 and select a subcategory.
51
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ “Recalculate” is displayed only when the
Modifying the Route Calculation
Conditions
route is set.
➲ “Recalculating the route to the destination
You can change the route calculation conditions
using the Route Options menu. The following
description features an example of changing the
number of routes to be searched.
using the Route Options menu” ➞ Page 48
Number of Routes
This setting controls whether the system should
calculate only one route, or several routes.
1*:
1 Touch “Route Options” in the NAVI
MENU.
Only one route judged as being optimum by your
navigation system is calculated.
Multiple:
Several route options are calculated (maximum 6
routes).
2 Touch “Number of Routes”.
The current settings appear under the name
of the item. Each time you touch the item, the
setting changes. Repeatedly touch the item
until the value you want to set appears.
Route Condition
This setting controls whether the route should be
calculated by taking into account the time or the
distance.
Fast*:
Calculate a route with the shortest travel time to
your destination as a priority.
Short:
Calculate a route with the shortest distance to
This section describes the details of the each
time. Settings marked with an asterisk (*) show
that they are default or factory settings.
Avoid Freeway
This setting controls whether freeways may be
included in the road calculation. (A route using a
freeway may be calculated in some cases, such
as when setting your destination far away.)
Edit Current Route
This displays a screen for adding or deleting way
points. The method is the same as described in
“Editing Way Points to the Current Route”.
Calculate a route that avoids freeways.
Off*:
Calculate a route that may include freeways.
❒ “Edit Current Route” is displayed only when
the route is set.
Avoid Ferry
➲ “Editing Way Points to the Current Route” ➞
This setting controls whether ferry crossings
should be taken into account.
On:
Calculate a route that avoids ferries.
Off*:
Page 48
View Current Route
➲ “Checking the set route with the map” ➞
Page 46
Calculate a route that may include ferries.
➲ “Checking the set route by text” ➞ Page 47
❒ The system may calculate a route that
➲ “Checking the entire route overview” ➞
includes ferries even if “On” is selected.
Page 47
Recalculate
Automatically searches the route to the destina-
tion again.
52
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displays the inability of fulfill the conditions by
icon.
Avoid Toll Road
This setting controls whether toll roads (including
toll areas) should be taken into account.
On:
• Pass through Area to Avoid
• Use toll road although the setting
“Avoid Toll Road” is “On”.
• Use Ferry although the setting “Avoid
Ferry” is “On”.
Calculate a route that avoids toll roads (including
toll areas).
Off*:
Calculate a route that may include toll roads
(including toll areas).
(2) Distance to your destination
(3) Travel time to your destination
❒ The “Avoid Freeway” setting may not be
reflected, depending on the distance to the
destination.
❒ The system may calculate a route that
includes toll roads even if “On” is selected.
❒ You can see other places while displaying
a possible route by scrolling the map.
Touching “Next” moves the next candidate
route to the center and indicates the map.
Designate Areas to Avoid
➲ About Areas to Avoid ➞ Page 49
Perform the route calculation for
several route options, and select
one
You can get route calculations for several route
options. After route options are calculated, select
the one you want.
4 Touch “Information” to check the infor-
mation on the selected route.
You can also check details of the roads along
the selected route. (If you touch “Back”, you
can return to the previous display.)
➲ “Route Scroll” ➞ Page 46 (Step 3, 4 and
5)
➲ “Route Profile” ➞ Page 47 (Step 3 and 4)
❒ After the route is calculated, it may take
some time until the detailed route informa-
tion (Route Profile) is displayed.
1 Set the “Number of Routes” to “Multi-
ple”.
2 Search your destination and set the route.
Calculated routes are shown in different col-
ors (from two to six routes).
5 Touch “OK”.
The route you selected is accepted, and the
map of your surroundings appears. When you
start driving, the route guidance begins.
❒ If the above operations are not performed
within 30 seconds after the route calcula-
tion is completed and you have already
started your vehicle, the route selected at
the time is automatically chosen.
3 Touch “Next” to change the displayed
route.
(1) (3) (2)
The following information is displayed on this
screen:
(1) Route calculation condition
Displays the conditions set by the Route
Options menu by icon.
• Use/avoid freeway
• Use/avoid toll road
• Use/avoid ferry
53
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
54
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 4
Editing the Navigation Utilities
1 Touch “Settings” in the NAVI MENU,
then touch “Defined Locations”.
• For safety reasons, you cannot use some of
these navigation functions while your
vehicle is in motion. To enable these func-
tions, you must stop in a safe place and
apply the parking brake (see page 13 for
details).
2 Touch “Set ”Go To””.
When registering your home location, touch
“Set ”Home””.
Editing Registered Locations
The Address Book can store up to 300 regis-
tered locations. These can include home loca-
tion, favorite places and destinations you have
already registered. This registered location infor-
mation can also be modified. Also, routes to reg-
istered locations can be calculated by touching
the screen. Registering places you visit frequently
saves time and effort.
❒ The items already registered under
“Return Home” or “Go to” can be modi-
fied.
3 Search for a location to register.
You can select a method of location search on
the display.
➲ Address Search ➞ Page 28
➲ Information on searching locations to reg-
ister ➞ Page 43 to 45
❒ If you select “Map Search”, move the
scroll cursor to the location you want to set
and touch “OK”.
❒ The Address Book is automatically updated in
alphabetic order. However, “Return Home”
and “Go to” always appear at the top.
Registering your home and your
favorite location
4 Point the scroll cursor to the location you
want to register and touch “OK”.
Of the 300 registered locations that can be
stored, home location and favorite locations can
be stored separately in the Address Book. Reg-
istering your favorite location for the first time is
described here. You can change the registered
information later. You might find it useful to regis-
ter your workplace or a relative’s home as your
favorite location.
5 Touch “Save”.
Completes the registration.
Map icons:
:
Home location icon
:
Favorite location icon
55
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Registering a previous location
in the Address Book
Editing a location’s information
In the Address Book menu, touching the
the right-hand side of the place displays the
Address Book Operate menu.
on
Once a destination or way point is searched, it is
automatically retained and stored in the Desti-
nation History. If a search is canceled while still
in progress, only the places where the map was
displayed and scrolled through or places where
the shortcut menu was displayed are retained
and stored. Note that after 100 places are stored,
new places are automatically overwritten on top
of old ones, in order from oldest to most recent.
Therefore, to ensure that certain places are kept
and not overwritten, be sure to register them in
the Address Book.
To edit the information about the location:
1 Touch “Destination” in the NAVI MENU,
then touch “Address Book”.
2 Touch
on the right-hand side of the
place whose information you want to edit.
1 Touch “Destination” in the NAVI MENU,
then touch “Destination History”.
2 Touch
on the right-hand side of the
place you want to register in the Address
Book.
:
➲ “When
➞ Page 41
Add:
appears to the right of the list”
The screen for selecting the method for regis-
tering the location in the Address Book
appears.
➲ Address Search ➞ Page 28
45
:
The map of that place can be displayed.
❒ If you select “Map Search”, move the
scroll cursor to the place you want to set
and touch “OK”.
➲ “When
➞ Page 41
appears to the right of the list”
3 Touch “Registration”.
3 Touch “Edit Information”.
4 Touch “Save”.
Registration is now complete.
❒ If you want to stop registration, touch
“Back”.
➲ “Editing a location’s information” ➞
Page 56
The Address Information menu appears. Refer
to the item corresponding to the subsequent
operation. After finishing the operation, the
Address Book menu appears. You can con-
tinue to edit other information items if neces-
sary.
56
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Selecting a pictograph to appear on the
map
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
1 Touch “Select Image”.
2 Touch the Pictograph to appear on the
map.
The Address Information menu appears.
❒ You cannot change the mark of your home
and your favorite location.
(1) Name
You can enter the desired name.
(2) Name (2nd line)
The name of the city appears in this column
(not editable).
Selecting sound
(3) Phone number
You can search by registered telephone num-
ber.
(4) Pictograph
The symbol displayed on the map.
(5) Sound
1 Touch “Select Sound”.
2 Select the sound.
The Address Information menu appears.
❒ If you want to hear the operating sound,
touch
.
The selected operating sound is played.
(6) Modify Location
Modify the location
You can change the registered location by
scrolling the map.
➲ Changing the position of locations ➞ Page 58
Deleting Address Book or Desti-
nation History information
4 Touch “Save”.
Completes the registration.
Items registered in the Address Book or Desti-
nation History can be deleted. All entries of the
data in the Address Book or Destination His-
tory can be deleted at once.
Changing a name
1 Touch “Edit Name”.
2 Enter a new name; touch “OK”.
The name of the current location appears in
the text box. Delete the current name, and
enter a new name between 1 and 23 charac-
ters long.
1 Touch “Destination” in the NAVI MENU,
then touch “Address Book”.
To delete items in the Destination History,
touch “Destination History”.
2 Touch
on the right-hand side of the
place you want to delete.
3 Touch “Save”.
The details you set are registered.
❒ You cannot change the name of your home.
3 Select the deletion method.
Entering or changing a phone number
1 Touch “Edit Phone Number”.
2 Input a phone number and touch “OK”.
The Address Information menu appears.
❒ To change a registered phone number,
delete the existing number and then enter
a new one.
Delete This Item:
Delete the location selected in Step 2.
57
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Delete All Address Book Entries (or
Delete All Destinations):
Delete all the Address Book or Destination
History data.
Loading registered locations
data from a Disc
Address Book data stored on a CD-R/-RW and
DVD-R/-RW can be loaded to the navigation sys-
tem.
This function is used when moving Address Book
data from a Pioneer navigation system with a PC
card slot (e.g., AVIC-88DVD) to a Pioneer naviga-
tion system without a PC card slot.
4 Select “Yes”.
The data you selected is deleted.
Alternative option:
No:
The display shown in Step 3 appears.
❒ When moving data, copy the folder named
“POINT” from the PC card to the personal
computer. Then use the personal computer to
store the “POINT” folder in the first level of
the CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW.
❒ Because deleted data cannot be restored,
take extra care not to select “Delete All
Address Book Entries” and “Delete All
Destinations” by mistake.
1 Insert the disc to the disc loading slot.
Changing the position of loca-
tions registered in the Address
Book
2 Touch “Settings” in the NAVI MENU,
then touch “System Options”.
You can select a location registered in the
Address Book, display a map of its surround-
ings and change its position.
3 Touch “Read from Disc”.
The list of groups appears.
4 Touch the desired group.
1 In the Address Book menu, touch
on
the right-hand side of the place whose
position you want to change.
5 Touch the desired locations.
Selected locations are marked. To load the
data from other locations, repeat this step.
Alternative option:
2 Touch “Edit Information”, and then touch
“Modify Location”.
All:
The map of the selected area and its sur-
roundings appears.
All the locations are selected (or canceled) at
once.
3 Touch the display to change its position,
then touch “OK”.
6 Touch “OK”.
The data of the selected locations is stored in
the Address Book.
4 Touch “Save”.
The position is changed.
58
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(1)
(2)
(4) (5)
Using XM NavTraffic Informa-
tion
If you have a GEX-P10XMT XM Digital Satellite
Data & Audio Receiver (sold separately) attached
to the navigation system, and have an active sub-
scription to XM NavTraffic service, you can view
current traffic conditions and information on your
navigation display. When the unit receives
updated traffic information, the navigation sys-
tem will overlay the traffic information on your
map, and also display detailed text information
when available. When you are traveling along a
route and there is traffic information on your cur-
rent route, the system will automatically detect it,
and ask you if you would like to be rerouted. (In
such case, route calculation takes into consider-
ation about 90 mile radius of alternative routes
and its traffic conditions from your current loca-
tion).
(3)
(1) Street or place
(2) Direction
(3) Incident
(4) Distance to the location
(5) The incident numbers currently dis-
played and the total number of incidents
❒ The incidents that have already been read
will be displayed in letters with a white out-
line. Unread incidents will be in white.
❒ Touching the
allows you to check the
place on a map. (Traffic information with-
out positional information cannot be
checked on a map.)
❒ The term “traffic congestion” in this section
indicated the following types of traffic infor-
mation: stop and go, stopped traffic and
closed/ blocked roads. This information is
always taken into consideration when check-
ing your route, and the information related
with these events cannot be turned off. Addi-
tionally, the system also takes into consider-
ation the traffic flow information if “Use the
traffic flow information” is “On”.
:
You can sort the traffic information in alpha-
betical order.
:
You can sort the traffic information according
to the incident.
:
You can sort the traffic information by dis-
tance from your current position.
Viewing traffic list
:
Traffic Information is displayed onscreen in a list.
This allows you to check how many traffic inci-
dents have occurred, their location and their dis-
tance from your current position.
When new traffic information is received, cur-
rent information is changed or old information
has been removed, the list is updated to
reflect the new situation.
Checking all traffic information
3 Select an incident you want to view in
detail.
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
then touch “Traffic Events”.
The list with received traffic information is
shown.
The details of the selected incident are dis-
played.
❒ Touching an incident you want to see
allows you to view the detailed information
of the incident. If the information cannot
be displayed on one screen, touch or
to view the remaining information.
2 Touch or to view the incident list.
Places (street names) where incidents have
occurred are displayed in the list.
4 Touch “Back” to return to the list with
traffic information.
A list with traffic information appears again.
59
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) Icon for traffic information
Checking traffic information on the
route
Displayed only when the scale on the map is
10 mi (20 km) or lower.
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Traffic On Route”.
The currently set traffic information on the
route appears on the screen.
➲ “Selecting traffic information to display” ➞
Page 62
If you want to check the traffic information
details, move the scroll cursor onto an icon such
❒ The method for checking the content dis-
played on the screen is the same for
“Checking all traffic information”.
➲ “Checking all traffic information” ➞
Page 59
as
and touch
. This allows you to view
place names and other information.
Information on avoiding traffic
congestion on route ahead
Confirming traffic information
on the map
The traffic-related information displayed on the
map is as follows.
If you are approaching traffic on your current
route, the navigation system has the ability to rec-
ommend an alternative route. Depending on the
information of traffic congestion you have
received and the setting of Use traffic flow infor-
mation, the navigation system will recommend
an alternate route automatically. On the freeway,
the navigation system will detect at least
1.6 miles (2.6 km) ahead of the specific traffic
incident.
(3)
If a better route can be calculated, the following
screen will appear.
❒ The following types of traffic incidents on the
route will be checked: stop and go, stopped
traffic and closed/blocked roads.
(2)
(1)
(or
(1) TRAFFIC icon
,
):
When a route has been calculated, touch to
check whether there is any traffic congestion
information on your route. When no route has
been calculated, touch to display the traffic list.
❒ When
is displayed, reading from the
DVD Map Disc is required. Please insert the
DVD Map Disc.
Difference in distance and travel time between
existing route and new route
❒ When
is displayed, the data is being
Distance from the current position of your vehicle
to the point of entry into the new route
loaded from the DVD Map Disc.
(2) A line to indicate the length of the traffic
congestion
Displayed only when the scale on the map is
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
0.75 mile (1km) or lower.
Traffic congestion:
Orange with white outline: stop and go traffic
Red with white outline: stopped traffic
Black with white outline: closed/blocked roads
60
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
New:
If there is no traffic congestion informa-
tion on the route
If there is no traffic congestion information, a
message appears to inform you that there is no
traffic congestion information on the route that is
shown.
A new route is displayed on the screen.
Current:
The current route is displayed on the screen.
OK:
Select the route to that displayed on the screen.
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
List:
The list with all traffic information is displayed.
Back:
The message disappears, and the screen returns
to the map screen.
❒ When no selection is made, the current route
will be automatically selected after a short
while.
When checking traffic conges-
tion information manually
Touching
on the screen allows you to
❒ In Memory Navi mode, no detailed informa-
check for traffic congestion information on your
route.
tion is available for traffic information on List.
If there is any information about a traffic conges-
tion on your route, a message appears asking you
whether to search for another route to avoid the
traffic congestion. If there is no traffic congestion
information along the route being guided, it is
announced on screen and by voice.
Traffic flow information
When the map scale is between 0.02 mi (25 m) to
0.75 mi (1 km), red, yellow, or green blinking lines
may appear on either side of a road. These colors
indicate the average speed at which traffic is
flowing along these streets. Here is a guide to the
colors and the average speed they indicate:
❒ The following types of traffic incidents on the
route will be checked: stop and go, stopped
traffic and closed/blocked roads.
If there is a traffic congestion informa-
tion on the route
When receiving information about a traffic con-
gestion, the message announcing the presence
of a traffic congestion is indicated.
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
Flow Icon
The line for traffic flow
Yes:
Red: average speed in this area is between
5 mph to 15 mph (8 km/h to 24 km/h)
The route is recalculated taking the traffic con-
gestion into account.
No:
The message disappears, and the map display
reappears.
List:
Yellow: average speed in this area is between
20 mph to 40 mph (32 km/h to 64 km/h)
Green: average speed in this area is 45 mph
(72 km/h) or faster (An icon without a number
indicates the average speed of the road is more
than 70 mph (112km/h).)
The list with traffic information is displayed.
❒ In the memory navi mode, you can only touch
❒ In addition to these blinking lines, a round
icon with a number may appear on the map.
The number in the icon indicates the actual
average speed of that specific area.
No.
❒ The flow icon appears only when the scale on
the map is 10 mi (20 km) or lower.
❒ You can turn off the use of Traffic flow infor-
mation.
61
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
➲ “Set use of Traffic flow information setting to
3 Touch the traffic information item to dis-
off” ➞ Page 62
play.
A red check appears next to the selected traf-
fic information.
Checking traffic flow information on the
list
The traffic flow information on the route can also
be displayed as an onscreen list.
❒ The method for checking the traffic flow infor-
mation displayed on the screen is the same
for “Checking all traffic information”.
➲ “Checking all traffic information” ➞ Page 59
❒ Touching “All” selects all the traffic infor-
mation.
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
then touch “Traffic Flow”.
4 Touch “Done”.
You can use
instead of
in the
The selected traffic information icon is added
to the screen.
traffic events list screen. The list with the traf-
fic flow information is shown.
The list will be sorted according to the average
❒ Touch “Back” to cancel your selection.
❒ The following types of traffic congestion
cannot be deselected and are always dis-
played: stop and go, stopped traffic, and
closed/blocked roads.
speed by touching
.
Selecting traffic information to
display
There are different types of traffic information
that can be received via the XM NavTraffic ser-
vice, and you can select which types will be incor-
porated and displayed on your navigation system.
5 Touch “Back”.
Set use of Traffic flow information set-
ting to off
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Traffic Settings”.
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Traffic Settings”.
2 Touch “On”.
2 Touch “Change”.
The names of the displayed traffic information
items and a list of icons appears on the
screen.
The button changes to “Off”.
3 Touch “Back”.
❒ If you wish to use the traffic flow information
again, touch “Off” to turn the button “On” in
the Traffic Settings screen.
62
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Input the Ticker text for the stocks you
wish to display, then touch “OK”.
Using the XM Tuner to View
Stock, Sports, and Other Infor-
mation
When an XM tuner (GEX-P10XMT) is connected,
you can receive stock price, sports, and other
information, and display it onscreen. You may
also register favorite information on the naviga-
tion system.
“Punc”:
You can input punctuation such as “!”and “:”.
“Oper”:
Displaying stock prices
This navigation system can display the prices of
up to 12 stocks.
You can input operators such as “+”and “–”.
❒ The method for inputting the text is the
same as for inputting street names.
➲ Text input method ➞ Page 29
❒ If the input ticker symbol does not match
the actual ticker symbol for the stock com-
pletely, you may not be able to find it.
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Stock Info”.
Deleting stocks to be displayed
onscreen
This navigation system can display the prices of
up to 12 stocks. If 12 stocks are already regis-
tered, delete as many entries as necessary to add
new stocks.
The screen displays a list of stock prices.
❒ Although the stock price information dis-
played onscreen is updated every 30 sec-
onds (approx.), these prices are not real-
time values.
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Stock Info”.
Registering stocks to be displayed
2 Touch “Delete”.
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Stock Info”.
3 Touch the ticker of the stock you wish to
delete.
A red check appears next to the ticker you
touched.
2 Touch “Add”.
❒ To delete all the registered stocks, touch
“All”. Red checks will appear next to all the
tickers.
4 Touch “Delete”.
5 A message will appear asking you to con-
firm the deletion. Touch “OK”.
63
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing browsable information
❒ The displayed items depend on the informa-
Displaying favorite browsable
Information
XM special contents can be assigned as a short-
cut or “My Favorites” so that it can be accessed
without having to search every time an update is
needed. The following are the instructions on
how to do so:
tion that is sent from each station.
❒ “My Favorites” can store up to 50 items.
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the Main menu,
then touch “Set My Favorites”.
The screen will display a list of categories. The
information appearing onscreen is automati-
cally updated at regular intervals.
1 Store the desired item (topic).
➲ “Storing browsable information” ➞
Page 64
2 Touch a category you want to browse
from the list.
2 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “My Favorites”.
A list of registered items (topics) appears on
the screen. Touch the item to display informa-
tion about this item.
Deleting favorite browsable information
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “My Favorites”.
3 Touch an item you wish to store.
2 Touch “Delete”.
3 Touch the name of the items you wish to
delete.
A red check appears next to the items you
touched.
❒ To delete all favorite contents, touch “All”.
Red checks will appear next to all the
items.
If an item is divided into more detail catego-
ries, select the one from the list to narrow
down the category. After narrowing down, a
message confirming whether or not to regis-
ter the item will appear.
4 Touch “Delete”.
5 A message will appear asking you to con-
firm the deletion. Touch “OK”.
4 Touch “OK”.
If the storing step is successful, the confirma-
tion screen will appear.
Touch “OK” to complete the storing and
return to the previous screen.
64
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Checking the Reception Status
of the XM Tuner
Emergency Info
The Emergency Info screen provides important
emergency information pertaining to your vehi-
cle, insurance, and current location. Such emer-
gency information could be useful in the event of
an accident or vehicle breakdown. The accuracy
of the personal information is dependent on the
accuracy of the information entered into the navi-
gation system by the user.
The current XM tuner’s (GEX-P10XMT) reception
status and signal strength appear on screen. (The
information that is transmitted via XM DATA
cable is displayed in this screen.)
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “XM Status”.
(1)
(2)
(3)
• The Emergency Info screen is only
intended to provide information to a driver
that may be useful during an emergency
situation, and does not replace the need to
call for emergency assistance, when nec-
essary.
(1) Status
Depending on the XM tuner’s (GEX-P10XMT)
reception status, any one of the following may
appear.
OK
No problem.
Checking the information regis-
tered as Emergency Info
Updating
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Emergency Info”.
Updating encryption code.
Check antenna
Improper antenna connection.
Not Connected
(1)
(2)
(2) Signal Strength
Depending on the signal strength, any one of the
following may appear.
• Very Strong
• Strong
• Marginal
• Weak
• No signal
(4)
(3)
The information registered as Emergency
Info appears on the screen.
(3) Radio ID
The radio ID appears.
(1) You are currently at:
Your current position is indicated by the street
name and your latitude and longitude.
❒ If you have subscribed to either XM audio only
or XM NavTraffic stand alone, you will see
“Updating” in the “Status”. This is because
the GEX-P10XMT is constantly checking to see
if you have decided to add the other service
while your navigation system is turned on. If
you subscribe to both services, the appropri-
ate status will be shown in the “Status”.
(2) Personal Information:
Your VIN number, insurance policy number, and
the telephone number of your insurance com-
pany can be displayed once entered by the user.
(3) Emergency TOW service phone:
1 year of free Emergency Roadside Assistance
service is available to all registered owners and
provided by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club,
Inc. The first year of Emergency Roadside Assis-
65
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
tance service is paid for by Pioneer only if your
navigation system is registered with Pioneer and
you sign up on-line with Signature’s Nationwide
Auto Club, Inc. at the time you register your navi-
gation system with Pioneer. If you have not
signed up for this service with Signature’s
Nationwide Auto Club, Inc., or if your free one-
year period has expired, you are subject to
charges by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club,
Inc. You are also subject to charges by Signa-
ture’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc. for roadside
services not included in the Emergency Roadside
Assistance service. The terms and conditions
regarding the Emergency Roadside Assistance
service provided by Signature’s Nationwide Auto
Club, Inc. are determined solely and exclusively
by Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc. Please
contact Signature’s Nationwide Auto Club, Inc.
for more information. The telephone number that
appears here by default is the toll free number for
this service. For additional details on registering
for this service, please check your product regis-
tration card included with this product. If you are
not interested in the free Roadside Assistance
service, this number can be edited and replaced
by your own roadside assistance telephone num-
ber.
❒ If information is already registered, the reg-
istered information will appear.
4 Input the number you wish to register,
and then touch “OK”.
Edit VIN
Register your Vehicle’s Identification Number.
(You can enter between 1 and 17 digits.)
Edit Policy number
Register your insurance policy number.
Edit Insurance Phone
Register your insurance company’s phone
number.
Edit TOW Service Phone
Record a towing company’s phone number.
❒ The police number is shown as 911 and can-
not be changed.
5 Touch “Save”.
(4) Locate Car Service
Completes the registration.
❒ If you want to stop registration, touch
“Back”.
➲ “Searching for car service in an emergency”
➞ Page 66
Registering user information
Searching for car service in an
emergency
In times of emergency, you can search the Emer-
gency Info for Auto Services in the vicinity of your
current position and set the current route.
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Emergency Info”.
2 Touch “Setup”.
3 Touch the desired item to register your
information.
• The Emergency Info screen is only
intended to provide information to a driver
that may be useful during an emergency
situation and if they are in a safe location.
If not, or in all major accidents, call 911.
66
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Touch “Info/Traffic” in the NAVI MENU,
and then touch “Emergency Info”.
When the
the list
appears on the right of
2 Touch “Locate Car Service”.
You can also set a destination by touching the
to the right of the list. Touch “OK” to confirm.
The location pointed to by the scroll cursor will be
set as a destination.
A list of auto services appears onscreen.
3 Touch the Category of the auto service
you wish to use.
Alternative option:
A red check appears next to the selected cate-
gory.
Scroll:
The map display changes to the map with Short-
cut menu.
If you touch anywhere on the map, the map dis-
play changes to Scroll mode.
➲ “Shortcut menu” ➞ Page 36
❒ The Auto Service categories that can be
selected in the Emergency Info are: “Auto-
motive”, “Rental Car Agency”, and “Car
Dealer”.
4 Touch “OK”.
A list of names of facilities in the vicinity and
the distances from your current position will
be displayed.
❒ Touching
displays a list of subcatego-
ries. Touch the subcategories you wish to
use from among those displayed and
touch “OK” to select the Auto Service from
the subcategories.
5 Touch the name of the facility to set the
route you want.
Displays the route to the selected facility.
67
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ You can only use standard characters (alpha-
bets of both cases: A-Z, a-z) and numbers (0-9)
for the file name of a background picture
(international (accented) characters cannot
be used).
Changing Background Picture
• When you burn a CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-
RW, make sure the total data size of the
CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW is greater than
the amount noted below by storing
dummy data or other filler information.
Otherwise, the disc may not be recognized
by the built-in DVD drive.
❒ Pictures up to a maximum of 2 048×1 536 pix-
els can be used. We cannot guarantee proper
operation for a picture bigger than this size.
❒ Progressive format JPEG pictures cannot be
used.
— CD-R/-RW: 1.8 MB
— DVD-R/-RW: 170 MB
1 Insert a disc to the disc loading slot.
2 Touch “Settings” in the NAVI MENU,
then touch “System Options”.
In the menu operation screen, you can specify a
picture for the background. Some pictures are
already stored, but you can also use pictures
(JPEG format data) created by a personal com-
puter or a digital camera. If you save the pictures
to a CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW, you can use
them as background pictures. The following three
types of background pictures can be changed:
• Splash Screen: The screen that appears
when the Navigation system starts up.
3 Touch “Background Picture Setting”.
The picture selected for each screen is indi-
cated on the right side of “Splash Screen”,
“Navigation Background” and “AV Back-
ground” items.
4 Touch “Splash Screen”, “Navigation
Background” or “AV Background”.
• AV Background: Background for the screen
during audio operations or during playback.
• Navigation Background: Background of nav-
igation menu screen.
Several background pictures are stored in the
Pioneer DVD Map Disc. If you want to use these
pictures, insert the Pioneer DVD Map Disc.
Here, a method for changing the background pic-
ture is described with an example of loading a
picture stored on a CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW
onto the navigation system as the background
picture.
5 Touch “Import from Disc”.
The list of the pictures stored in the disc is dis-
played.
On this screen, you can select the following
item:
“Back to Original”:
The picture originally used when the system
was purchased is selected.
❒ Only when a Pioneer DVD Map Disc is
inserted, you can select “Back to Origi-
nal”. Only when the CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/
-RW is inserted, you can select “Import
from Disc”.
❒ In step 5, touching other than “Import
from Disc” allows you to select a back-
ground image stored on the Pioneer DVD
Map Disc.
❒ When storing original pictures on a CD-R/-RW
and DVD-R/-RW, create a folder named “PIC-
TURES” in the CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW,
and store the picture files in this folder. Up to
20 picture files can be used in the PIC-
TURES folder.
❒ You cannot use a CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW
containing MP3/WMA/AAC files or the Audio
data part (CD-DA session) for the “Back-
ground Picture Setting” function.
❒ Only JPEG format (“.jpg” or “.JPG”) pictures
can be used as a background picture.
68
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
6 Touch a picture you want for the back-
ground.
Setting the Vehicle Dynamics
Display
7 Select how to display the picture.
You can select the following items:
“Center”:
You can change the values displayed by the
instruments on the left and right of the Vehicle
Dynamics Display.
Until the sensor’s initial learning is complete,
only the voltage and clock are available.
Selected picture is displayed at the center of
the screen.
“Repeat”:
Selected picture is repeated in a pattern to
cover the whole screen.
1 Switch to the Vehicle Dynamics Display.
➲ Changing the map display mode ➞
Page 37
The background image starts changing. After
a short while, the new background image
appears.
2 Touch the left or right instrument.
Touch keys are displayed.
❒ When you select images stored on the Pio-
neer DVD Map Disc, you cannot select the
layout method.
3 Touch the items you want to display.
❒ When the picture starts to change, do not
turn off the vehicle engine until the mes-
sage appears to indicate that the picture
has finished changing.
8 Touch “Done”.
You can select the following items.
Voltage:
Displays the power supply and voltage sup-
plied from the battery to this system.
Acceleration:
Displays acceleration in a forward direction.
The + sign indicates acceleration while the –
sign indicates deceleration.
Side Acceleration:
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
Displays acceleration in a side direction, such
as when turning. The + sign indicates a right
turn, while the – sign indicates a left turn.
Angular Velocity:
Displays the vehicle’s turning angle over one
second (how far it has turned in a second).
Slope:
Displays the vehicle’s vertical movement. The
+ side represents the rising angle, and the –
side the falling angle.
“Select another Picture”:
This is selected when you want to change to
another picture. Return to Step 5.
“Change another Background”:
Select if you want to successively change the
Splash Screen, Audio Operating screen back-
grounds or the navigation backgrounds.
Return to step 3.
❒ When the navigation system is reset, or the
language setting is changed, the back-
ground picture may change back to the
original picture. (There is also a possibility
that the system will revert to the original
picture for some other reason). If this hap-
pens, set the background picture again.
Direction:
Displays the direction your vehicle is traveling
in.
Clock:
Displays the current time.
69
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Adjust Look:
(4) Degree of learning
Touch “Adjust Look” to display a screen for
selecting the panel pattern. Touch one of the
patterns from among those displayed
onscreen to change the panel to the selected
pattern.
❒ If you touch “Peak Hold Reset”, the maxi-
mum and minimum (green line) values
indicated in “Acceleration” and “Side
Acceleration” are reset.
❒ You cannot change the speedometer at the
center.
❒ Selecting Demo Mode in the Settings
menu enables you to perform a demon-
stration with random values.
Sensor learning situations for distance (Dis-
tance), right turn (Right Turn), left turn (Left
Turn) and 3D detection (3D Detection) are
indicated by the length of bars.
❒ When tires have been changed or chains
fitted, turning on the Speed Pulse allows
the system to detect the fact that the tire
diameter has changed, and automatically
replaces the value for calculating distance.
❒ If the ND-PG1 is connected, the distance
calculation value cannot be replaced auto-
matically.
(5) Speed
Speed detected by the navigation system is
indicated. (This indication may be different
from the actual speed of your vehicle, so
please do not use this instead of the speedom-
eter of your vehicle.)
(6) Acceleration or deceleration/Rota-
tional speed
Acceleration or deceleration velocity of your
vehicle is indicated. Also, rotational speed
when your vehicle turns to left or right is
shown.
Checking the Navigation Status
The navigation status, including the driving sta-
tus of a vehicle, positioning status by satellite,
learning status of the 3D sensor and cable con-
nection status, can be checked.
Checking sensor learning status
and driving status
(7) Inclination
Degree of slope of the street is indicated.
1 Touch “Settings” in the NAVI MENU,
then touch “Hardware Info”.
To clear values...
2 Touch “3D Calibration”.
If you want to delete the learned results stored in
“Distance”, “Speed Pulse” or “Learning Sta-
tus”, touch the relevant result, then touch
“Clear”.
The 3D Calibration screen appears.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
❒ The navigation system can automatically use
its sensor memory based on the outer dimen-
sions of the tires.
(6) (7) (5)
Checking the connections of
leads and installation positions
Check that leads are properly connected between
the navigation system and the vehicle. Please
also check whether they are connected in the
correct positions.
(1) Distance
Driving distance is indicated.
(2) Speed Pulse
Total number of speed pulses is indicated.
(3) Learning Status
Current driving mode is indicated.
70
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Touch “Settings” in the NAVI MENU,
then touch “Hardware Info”.
(7) Back Signal
When the gear lever is shifted to “R”, the sig-
nal switches to “High” or “Low”. (Which of
these is displayed depends on the vehicle.)
2 Touch “Connection Status”.
The Connection Status screen appears.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
(6)
(7)
(1) Speed Pulse
The Speed Pulse value detected by the naviga-
tion system is shown. “0” is shown while the
vehicle is stationary.
(2) GPS Antenna
Indicates the connection status of the GPS
antenna, the reception sensitivity and from
how many satellites the signal is received.
If the signal is received correctly, “OK” is dis-
played. If reception is poor, “NOK” appears.
(3) Installation Position
The installation position of the navigation sys-
tem is shown.
If installed correctly, “OK” appears. Indicates
whether the installation position of the naviga-
tion system is correct or not. When the navi-
gation system is installed at an extreme angle
exceeding the limitation of the installing
angle, “Incorrect angle” will be displayed.
When the angle of the navigation system has
been changed, “Excessive vibration” will be
displayed.
(4) Parking Brake
When the parking brake is applied, “On” is
displayed. When the parking brake is
released, “Off” is displayed.
(5) Power Voltage
The power supply (reference value) provided
from the vehicle battery to the navigation sys-
tem is shown. If the voltage does not fall
within the range of 11 V to 15 V, check that
power cable connection is correct.
(6) Illumination
When the headlights or small lamps of a vehi-
cle are on, “On” is displayed. (If the orange/
white lead is not connected, “Off” appears.)
71
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
72
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 5
Customizing Your Navigation System
• For safety reasons, you cannot use some of
these navigation functions while your
vehicle is in motion. To enable these func-
tions, you must stop in a safe place and
apply the parking brake (see page 13 for
details).
“Mile & Yard” is displayed below “KM/Mile
Setting”, indicating that “KM/Mile Setting”
is set to “Mile & Yard”.
Modifying the Default Settings
If you want to change another setting, select
the item you want to change and repeat the
procedure in step 3.
You can tailor default settings, such as naviga-
tion functions and information display, for ease of
use.
The following example describes how to change
settings. In this example, the “KM/Mile Setting”
settings is set to “Mile & Yard”.
Items Users can Change
This section describes the details of the setting
for each item. Settings marked with an asterisk
(*) show that they are default or factory settings.
1 Touch “Settings” in the NAVI MENU.
The Settings menu appears.
Volume
2 Touch “System Options”.
The sound volume for the navigation can be set.
You can set the volume of the route guidance and
the beep sound separately.
To display the Volume setting screen, touch “Vol-
ume” in the Settings menu.
The screen changes. “Mile” is displayed
below “KM/Mile Setting”, indicating that
this function is currently set to “Mile”.
❒ When you touch items with a setting below
them, their setting changes. When you
touch items with no setting below them, a
setting screen appears.
❒ Touching “Back” switch to Settings
Menu.
3 Touch “KM/Mile Setting”.
❒ When you move to the Volume setting screen
by touching “Volume” in the Settings menu,
touching “Back” returns you to the Settings
menu screen.
Guidance Volume
Touch “+” or “–” to change the Guidance volume.
Beep Volume
Touch “+” or “–” to change the Beep volume.
73
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Voice Guidance
Average Speed
This setting controls whether the volume of the
Audio source is automatically muted during voice
guidance.
When calculating estimated time of arrival and
average speed for the freeway or ordinary road
using “+” and “–”.
On*:
During voice guidance, the volume of the Audio
source is muted automatically.
Off:
Volume of the Audio source stays the same dur-
ing voice guidance.
Minor Ordinary Road
• When the “KM/Mile Setting” is set to “Mile”
or “Mile & Yard”, it can be set in 5 mile incre-
ments from 10 miles to 100 miles (35 miles*).
• When the “KM/Mile Setting” is set to “km”, it
can be set in 5 km increments from 20 km to
110 km (55 km*).
❒ When Voice Guidance is “On”, be sure to set
the Mute Input/Guide setting in the AV
MENU to “Mute” or “ATT”.
Major Ordinary Road
➲ Switching the muting/attenuation ➞ Page 129
• When the “KM/Mile Setting” is set to “Mile”
or “Mile & Yard”, it can be set in 5 mile incre-
ments from 10 miles to 120 miles (45 miles*).
can be set in 5 km increments from 20 km to
150 km (70 km*).
System Options
to display.
Freeway
or “Mile & Yard”, it can be set in 5 mile incre-
ments from 30 miles to (120 miles (60 miles*).
• When the “KM/Mile Setting” is set to “km”, it
can be set in 5 km increments from 60 km to
150 km (95 km*).
Language Selection
Background Picture Setting
➲ The language displayed can be set ➞
Page 136
➲ “Changing Background Picture” ➞ Page 68
Once you change the language, installation of
the program starts.
Read from Disc
➲ “Loading registered locations data from a
Disc” ➞ Page 58
• Once the installation of the program starts,
do not stop the engine of your vehicle and
do not switch off the navigation system
until the installation is completed and the
map of your surroundings appears.
Short-Cut Selection
Select shortcuts to display on the map screen. In
the list displayed onscreen, the items with red
checks are displayed on the map screen.
Touch the shortcut you wish to display and then
touch “Done” when a red check appears. You
can select up to three shortcuts.
KM/Mile Setting
This setting controls the unit of distance dis-
played on your navigation system.
Mile *:
Show distances in miles.
Mile & Yard:
Show distances in miles and yards.
km:
Show distances in kilometers.
74
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
: Registration*
: My Favorites
Register information about the location indicated
by the scroll cursor to the Address Book.
Displays information on your favorite item.
➲ “Displaying favorite browsable Information” ➞
: Vicinity Search*
Page 64
Find POIs (Points Of Interest) in the vicinity of the
scroll cursor.
Map Display Options
Touch “Map Display Options” in the Settings
➲ “Searching the facilities around the scroll cur-
sor” ➞ Page 44
: Volume Setting*
Set the sound volume for the navigation.
➲ “Volume” ➞ Page 73
: Whole Route Overview
Displays the entire currently set route.
➲ Checking the whole route overview ➞ Page 47
: Overlay POI
Displays marks for surrounding facilities (POI) on
the map.
The tracking display setting has the following
options.
Always:
➲ “Displaying Certain POI on the Map” ➞
Display tracking for all journeys.
This Trip:
Display tracking dots but erase them when the
navigation system is turned off (when turning off
the engine of your vehicle).
Off*:
Page 50
: Address Book
Displays the Address Book.
➲ Editing the Address Book ➞ Page 56
: Route Options
➲ Displaying Route Options menu ➞ Page 52
AV Guide Mode
Set whether to automatically switch to the navi-
gation screen from the AV operation screen when
your vehicle approaches a guidance point such
as an intersection while displaying a screen other
than navigation.
: Edit Current Route
Displays the screen for adding or deleting way
points.
➲ Adding or deleting way points ➞ Page 48
On*:
: Traffic On Route
Displaying a list of traffic information on the
route.
Switches from AV operation screen to navigation
screen.
Off:
➲ Displaying traffic information on the route ➞
Does not switch the screen.
Page 60
Day/Night Display
: Stock Info
To improve the visibility of the map during the
evening, you can change the combination of the
colors of the map.
Displays share prices.
➲ Displaying share prices ➞ Page 63
: Set My Favorites
Nighttime*:
Displays the screen of storing browsable item for
XM tuner.
You can change the combination of the colors of
a map according to whether the vehicle lights are
On or Off.
➲ “Storing browsable information” ➞ Page 64
Daytime:
The map is always displayed with bright colors.
75
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Around Current Position
Close-up of Junction
This setting enables switching to an enlarged
map around the point where your vehicle is
approaching an intersection, entrance/exit of
freeway or a junction.
A square that has sides of approximately
10.6 miles (17 km) with the selected location at
the center is read into the memory.
Indicate the map you want to store in the memory
by touching , , or . Then, adjust the map
scale to the one you desire, and touch “OK”.
Continuously touching , , or allows you
to rapidly scroll the map screen.
On*:
Switches to an enlarged map.
Off:
Does not switch to an enlarged map.
❒ An area not stored in the DVD Map Disc can-
Arrow in AV
not be memorized.
Set whether to display the guidance information
with arrows on the AV Operation screen.
On*:
Around Current Route
Sets the surrounding currently set route to the
memory area. The route to the destination will
appear on screen. You can memorize the area by
touching “OK”.
Displays guidance information with arrows on
the AV Operation screen.
Off:
Does not display guidance information with
arrows on the AV Operation screen.
❒ The extent of the information that can be set
in the memory area is about 6.6 miles (10.6
km) surrounding the route.
Defined Locations
Touch “Defined Locations” in the Settings
Set ”Go To”
➲ Registering and changing your favorite loca-
menu to display.
tion ➞ Page 55
Demo Mode
This is a demonstration function for shops. After
a route is set, a simulation of route guidance to a
destination is automatically displayed. Normally,
set this to “Off”.
Repeat:
Repeat demo drive.
Off*:
Set ”Home”
➲ Registering and changing your home location
➞ Page 55
Demo Mode is set off.
❒ If you eject the DVD Map Disc during the
Map in Memory
demo drive, the demo mode will be stopped.
The memory area is the area in the map, which is
being read in advance for the memory navi mode.
There are two ways of setting the memory area.
Time
Adjusts the systems clock. The time difference
(+, –) between the time originally set in your navi-
gation system is set here.
You can also select summer time On/Off.
➲ Time settings ➞ Page 137
Summer Time
Choose whether or not to take summer time into
account.
On:
Summer time is taken into account.
76
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Off*:
Summer time is not taken into account.
❒ When the period of summer time comes, or
when the summer time ends, your navigation
system does not automatically change the
summer time setting.
➲ Change the summer time setting ➞ Page 137
Modify Current Location
Touch the screen to adjust the current position
and direction of the vehicle displayed on the map.
Hardware Info
display.
Connection Status
➲ “Checking the connections of leads and
installation positions” ➞ Page 70
3D Calibration
Service Info Screen
Displays the disc production number and version
information.
Restore Factory Settings
Reset various settings registered to the naviga-
tion system and restores to the default or factory
settings. To restore, touch “Yes”.
❒ About the item return to the default, please
check “Display Information” at the end of
this manual.
77
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
78
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 6
Using the AV Source (Built-in DVD Drive and Radio)
This chapter describes how to display the AV
MENU for AV operations and perform operations
with the DVD drive and radio.
How to Display each Menu
1 Press the VOLUME knob (or AV button) to
switch to the AV operation screen.
2 Press the MENU button to change to the
AV MENU.
79
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Touch “Sound”, “Function” or “System” to enter the menu you want to operate.
Each menu is displayed. The items that cannot be operated according to the sources or conditions
are indicated in gray.
❒ If you touch “AV Source”, the screen changes to the AV Source screen.
Function menu
(2)
(3)
(1)
Sound menu
System menu
(1) Function key
Touch to enter the Function menu for each source.
➲ Using the Function menu ➞ “Operation using the Function menu” and “Advanced <each
source> operation”
(2) Sound key
Touch to select various sound quality controls.
➲ Using the Sound menu ➞ Page 123
(3) System key
Touch to select various setup functions.
➲ Using the System menu ➞ Page 130
4 Press the MENU button to return to the display of each source.
80
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DivX
Operating the Built-in DVD drive
(1)
(12)
(3) (7)
This section explains the operation of DVD-Video,
CD, MP3/WMA/AAC or DivX.
(15)
(6)
❒ The built-in DVD drive of this unit can recog-
nize the several types of media as following
sources.
— DVD-Video: “DVD-V”
— Audio data (CD-DA): “CD”
— Compressed audio (MP3/WMA/AAC) files:
“ROM”
(14)
See the following pages for instructions on oper-
ating each type of disc.
— DivX video files: “DivX”
➲ “Touch key operation (DVD-V)” ➞ Page 82
➲ “Touch key operation (CD, ROM)” ➞ Page 85
➲ “Touch key operation (DivX)” ➞ Page 87
❒ Also see at “Handling and Care of the Disc”
for more cautions about handling each media.
DVD-Video
(1) Source icon
(1)
(2)
(3) (7)
(4)
(2) Title number indicator
(3) Chapter or file number indicator
(4) Play time indicator
(5)
(6)
(5) Viewing angle indicator
(6) Subtitle language indicator
(7) Audio language indicator
(8) Track number indicator
CD
(1)
(8)
(4)
(9) Repeat/Random/Scan indicator
The marks shown below indicate the current play-
back status.
and repeat range: Displays the repeat range
: Random
: Scan
(10) Detail information display
Displays the track title, artist and disc title.
: Track title
(9)
(10)
: Artist
: Disc title (album title)
ROM (MP3/WMA/AAC files)
(1)
(12)
(8)
(4)
❒ The “–” mark is displayed if there is no corre-
sponding information.
(13)
(11) Current folder name indicator
(12) Folder number indicator
(13) File type indicator
(14) Audio indicator
(15) Repeat indicator
(11)
(10)
(9)
81
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Touch keys (Page 1)
Switching the media files type
(2) (1)
When playing a disc containing a mixture of vari-
ous media file types such as DivX and MP3, you
can switch between media files types to play.
1 Touch “Media” to switch between media
file types.
(2)
(6)
Touch “Media” repeatedly to switch between
the following media file types:
CD (audio data (CD-DA)) — ROM (MP3/WMA/
AAC files) — DivX (DivX video files)
(7) (4)
(3)
❒ There is sometimes a delay between starting
up playback and the sound being issued. This
is particularly the case when playing back
multi-session discs and discs with many fold-
ers. When being read in, Reading Format is
displayed.
Touch keys (Page 2)
(8)
(5)
❒ Playback is carried out in order of file number.
Folders are skipped if they contain no files. (If
folder 001 (ROOT) contains no files, playback
commences with folder 002.)
(7) (4) (3)
Touch keys (Page 3)
❒ When playing back files recorded as VBR (var-
iable bit rate) files, the play time will not be
correctly displayed if fast forward or rewind
operations are used.
❒ If more than 255 tracks are stored in the
folder, some time may be required to display
the track list.
❒ With some discs, the icon
played, meaning that the operation is not
valid.
may be dis-
Touch key operation (DVD-V)
1 Touch “DISC” in the AV Source screen to
select the built-in DVD drive.
(1) Playback and Pause
Pause lets you temporarily stop disc playback.
Touching switches between “playback”
and “pause”.
If no disc is loaded in navigation system, you
cannot select “DISC” (built-in DVD drive).
➲ “Selecting an AV source” ➞ Page 32
❒ The icon is displayed and playback is
paused letting you view a still image.
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
(2) Skip the chapter forward or backward
Touching skips to the start of the next
chapter. Touching once skips to the start
of the current chapter. Touching again will
skip to the previous chapter.
❒ You can also select a chapter by pressing
the or button on the hardware.
82
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(3) Hide the touch keys
Touching “Hide” clears the touch keys.
(1) Repeating play
Each touch of “Repeat” changes the settings as
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen, display
the touch keys again.
follows:
• Title — Repeat just the current title
• Chapter — Repeat just the current chapter
• Disc — Play throughout the current disc
(4) Switch the display
Touching “Disp” changes the information as
❒ If you perform chapter (title) search, fast for-
ward/rewind or slow motion playback, the
repeat play range changes to “Disc”.
follows:
Disc information display — Repeat range dis-
play
(2) Selecting audio output
When playing DVD-Video discs recorded with
(5) Skip the title forward or backward
Touching skips to the start of the next title.
LPCM audio, you can switch the audio output.
Touch “L/R Select” repeatedly until the desired
audio output appears in the display.
• L+R — Left and right
• L — Left
• R — Right
Touching skips to the start of the previous
title.
(6) Stop playback
When you stop playback by touching , that
location on the disc is memorized enabling
playback from that point when you play the
disc again.
• Mix— Mixing left and right
❒ This function is not possible when disc play-
❒ To play the disc again, touch .
back has been stopped.
(7) Switch to other pages of touch keys
(3) Setting Up the DVD/DivX Player
(8) Fast rewind or forward
Touching or to perform fast rewind or
➲ “Setting Up the DVD/DivX Player” ➞ Page 126
forward.
Other functions (DVD-V)
If you keep touching or for five sec-
onds, the icon or changes into
Operating the DVD menu
tents using a menu.
or
. When this happens, fast rewind/ fast
forward continues even if you release or
touch , or opposite to key
pushed for five seconds .
❒ This function is available for DVD-Video.
❒ You can display the menu by touching Menu
or TOP M. while a disc is playing. Touching
either of these keys again lets you start play-
back from the location selected from the
menu. For details, refer to the instructions
provided with the disc.
❒ You can also perform fast rewind/fast for-
ward by holding the or button on
the hardware.
Operation using the Function
menu (DVD-V)
Using DVD menu direct touch control
This function allows you to operate the DVD
menu by touching the menu item on the screen
directly.
➲ How to display the Function menu ➞
Page 79 to 80
Function menu
(1)
(2)
(3)
83
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
key
To return to normal playback, touch .
is displayed on the lower right corner of the
LCD screen.
2 Press to adjust playback speed during
slow motion playback.
❒ Depending on the contents of DVD discs, this
function may not work properly. In this case,
use touch panel keys to operate the DVD
menu.
Each time you press it changes the speed
in four steps in the following order:
1/16 — 1/8 — 1/4 — 1/2
❒ There is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
❒ Touch
key to display touch panel keys
to operate DVD menu. And then touch “ESC”,
❒ With some discs, images may be unclear
during slow motion playback.
❒ Reverse slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
key is not displayed.
➲ “Using DVD menu by touch panel keys” ➞
Page 84
Searching for a playback location
When playing back a DVD-Video, you can search
for a specific title, chapter or time to begin play-
Using DVD menu by touch panel keys
If
key is not displayed, DVD menu is oper-
ated by touch panel keys.
❒ Chapter search and time search are not possi-
ble when disc playback has been stopped.
2 Touch
.
Touch panel keys to operate DVD menu
appear.
1 Touch “Search” and then touch desired
item.
When playing a DVD, touch “Title” (title),
“Chapter” (chapter) or “Time” (time).
3 Touch , , or to select the desired
menu item, and touch ENTER.
Playback starts from the selected menu item.
❒ Touch “Touch” to switch direct touch con-
trol.
2 Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired number.
For titles and chapters
• To select 3, touch 3.
➲ “Using DVD menu direct touch control” ➞
Page 83
• To select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order.
• To select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order.
For time (time search)
❒ The way to display the menu differs depending
• To select 21 minutes 43 seconds, touch 2, 1,
4 and 3 in order.
on the disc.
• To select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the
time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch
7, 1, 0 and 0 in order.
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time dur-
ing playback.
❒ To cancel the input numbers, touch
“Clear”.
1 Touch during playback.
Each time you touch , you move ahead one
frame.
3 While the input number is displayed,
touch “Enter”.
To return to normal playback, touch .
❒ With some discs, images may be unclear
during frame-by-frame playback.
This starts playback from the selected scene.
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
1 Keep touching until
is displayed
during playback.
The icon
is displayed, forward slow
motion playback begins.
84
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Touch “Angle” during playback of a
scene shot from multiple angles.
Each time you touch “Angle” switches
between angle.
Changing audio system and audio lan-
guage during playback (Multi-audio)
With DVDs featuring multi-audio recordings, you
can switch between languages/audio systems
during playback.
❒ Touching “Angle” during fast forward/fast
rewind, pause or slow motion playback
returns you to normal playback.
1 Touch “Audio” during playback.
Each time you touch “Audio” switches
between audio mode.
Resume playback (Bookmark)
When playing DVD-Video discs, you can use this
function.
The Bookmark function lets you resume playback
from a selected scene the next time the disc is
loaded.
❒ With some DVDs, switching between lan-
guages/audio systems may only be possi-
ble while using a menu display.
❒ Display indications such as Dolby D and
M ch indicate the audio system recorded
on the DVD. Depending on the setting,
playback may not be with the same audio
system as the one indicated.
Touching “B.Mark”;
You can bookmark a point for every five disc.
If you try to memorize a point for the same disc,
the oldest bookmark will be replaced by the new
one.
❒ Touching “Audio” during fast forward/fast
rewind, pause or slow motion playback
returns you to normal playback.
❒ To clear the bookmark on a disc, keep touch-
ing “B.Mark” during playback.
Changing the subtitle language during
playback (Multi-subtitle)
With DVDs featuring multi-subtitle recordings,
you can switch between subtitle languages dur-
ing playback.
Pressing and holding the EJECT button;
You can also bookmark a point for one disc by
pressing and holding the EJECT button.
Next time you load the same disc, playback will
resume from the bookmarked point.
If you newly bookmark a point for with this
method, previous bookmarked point will be over-
written.
1 Touch “S.Title” during playback.
Each time you touch “S.Title” switches
between subtitle language.
❒ With some DVDs, switching between sub-
title languages may only be possible using
a menu display.
❒ Touching “S.Title” during fast forward/
fast rewind, pause or slow motion playback
returns you to normal playback.
❒ In playback, the point bookmarked with this
method is given priority over the point book-
marked with using “B.Mark”.
Touch key operation (CD, ROM)
Changing the viewing angle during
playback (Multi-angle)
With DVDs featuring multi-angle (scenes shot
from multiple angles) recordings, you can switch
among viewing angles during playback.
1 Touch “DISC” in the AV Source screen to
select the built-in DVD drive.
If no disc is loaded in navigation system, you
cannot select “DISC” (built-in DVD drive).
➲ “Selecting an AV source” ➞ Page 32
❒ During playback of a scene shot from multiple
angles, the angle icon
is displayed. Turn
angle icon display on or off using DVD/DivX
Setup menu.
➲ Setting angle icon ➞ Page 127
85
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
(4) Move the folder up or down
When a ROM is played, touch or to select
the desired folder.
You cannot select a folder that does not have
a MP3/WMA/AAC file recorded in it.
Touch keys (CD)
(2) (1)
Displaying text information
1 Touch
.
The next piece of information is displayed.
(2)
• Album Title (album title)
• Track Title (track title)
• Folder Title (folder title)
• File Name (file name)
• Artist Name (artist name)
• Genre (genre)
(3)
Touch keys (ROM)
(2) (1)
• Year (year)
If specific information has not been recorded
on MP3/WMA/AAC files on disc, nothing may
be displayed.
(4)
(2)
Select the track from the list
The list lets you see the list of track titles, file
names or folder names on a disc and select one
of them to play back.
(3)
(1) Playback and Pause
Pause lets you temporarily stop disc playback.
Touching switches between “playback”
and “pause”.
PAUSE is displayed and playback is paused.
1 Touch “List”.
(2) Skip the track forward or backward
To return to the previous screen, touch
“Detail”.
Touching skips to the start of the next
track. Touching once skips to the start of
the current track or file. Touching again will
skip to the previous track or file.
❒ Touching or switches to the next or
previous page in the list.
❒ The “–” mark is displayed if there is no cor-
responding information.
❒ You can also select a track or file by press-
ing the or button on the hardware.
Fast rewind or forward
Moving to upper folders
Keep touching or to perform fast
When using a MP3/WMA/AAC disc in which the
data is divided into folders, you can move a track
or file to upper folders. This is used to play back
tracks or files recorded in other folders.
rewind or forward.
❒ You can also perform fast rewind/fast for-
ward by holding the or button on
the hardware.
1 Touch
.
(3) Hide the touch keys
Touching “Hide” clears the touch keys.
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen, display
the touch keys again.
❒
is only displayed when the list is
displayed.
❒ If the current folder is the ROOT folder,
is displayed in gray.
86
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ If the upper folder has no MP3/WMA/AAC
files, the track or file currently playing will
not change.
❒ When “Folder” is selected, it is not possible to
play back a subfolder of that folder.
and audio data (CD-DA), repeat play is per-
formed within the currently playing data ses-
sion even if “Disc” is selected.
All of the songs in a disc can be played at random
by only touching one key.
(2) Play tracks in a random order
1 Touch “Shuffle All”.
Touching “Random” switches between “On” and
To cancel the random play, switch “Random”
to “Off” in the Function menu.
“Off”. When using ROM, the tracks in the current
repeat play range are randomly played.
❒ If you turn “Random” to “On” during the
repeat play range is “Track”, the repeat play
range changes to “Folder” automatically.
Operation using the Function
menu (CD, ROM)
➲ How to display the Function menu ➞
(3) CD: Scan tracks of a CD
Touching “Scan” switches between “On” and
Page 79 to 80
“Off”. Scan play lets you hear the first 10 seconds
of each track on the CD. When you find the
desired track, touch “Scan” to turn scan play off.
Function menu (e.g., CD)
❒ After scanning of a CD is finished, normal
playback of the tracks will begin again.
ROM: Scan folders and tracks
Touching “Scan” switches between “On” and
“Off”. Scan play is performed in the current
repeat play range. When you find the desired
track, touch “Scan” to turn scan play off.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(1) Repeating play
Each touch of “Repeat” changes the settings as
❒ After track or folder scanning is finished, nor-
mal playback of the tracks will begin again.
follows:
CD:
❒ If you turn “Scan” to “On” during the repeat
play range is “Track”, the repeat play range
• Disc — Repeat the current disc
• Track — Repeat just the current track
❒ If you perform track search or fast forward/
❒ If you turn “Scan” to “On” during the repeat
play range is “Disc”, the scan play is per-
formed only first tracks of each folders.
rewind, repeat play is automatically canceled.
❒ When playing discs with MP3/WMA/AAC files
and audio data (CD-DA), repeat play is per-
formed within the each data session even if
“Disc” is selected.
Touch key operation (DivX)
1 Touch “DISC” in the AV Source screen to
select the built-in DVD drive.
ROM:
• Folder — Repeat the current folder
• Disc — Repeat all tracks
• Track — Repeat just the current track
If no disc is loaded in navigation system, you
cannot select “DISC” (built-in DVD drive).
➲ “Selecting an AV source” ➞ Page 32
❒ If you select another folder during repeat play,
the repeat play range changes to “Disc”.
❒ If you perform fast forward/rewind during
“Track”, the repeat play range changes to
“Folder”.
87
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
(4) Switch the display
Touching “Disp” changes the information as
follows:
Audio, SubTitle, Repeat display — Folder
name display — File name display
Touch keys (Page 1)
❒ The following screen appears when the
vehicle is stopped. When the vehicle is
moving, the shape of the touch keys
changes.
(5) Move the folder up or down
Touch or to select the desired folder.
You cannot select a folder that does not have
a DivX file recorded in it.
(2) (1)
(6) Stop playback
(5)
location on the disc is memorized enabling
playback from that point when you play the
disc again.
(2)
(6)
❒ To play the disc again, touch .
(7) Switch to other pages of touch keys
(7) (4)
(3)
Operation using the Function
menu (DivX)
Touch keys (Page 2)
➲ How to display the Function menu ➞
Page 79 to 80
Function menu
(5)
(3)
(7) (4)
❒ With some discs, the icon
may be dis-
played, meaning that the operation is not
valid.
(1)
(2)
(1) Playback and Pause
(1) Repeating play
Pause lets you temporarily stop disc playback.
Each touch of “Repeat” changes the settings as
Touching switches between “playback”
and “pause”.
follows:
• Folder — Repeat the current folder
• Disc — Repeat all files
• File — Repeat just the current file
❒ The icon is displayed and playback is
paused letting you view a still image.
(2) Skip the file forward or backward
Touching skips to the start of the next file.
❒ If you select another folder during repeat play,
the repeat play range changes to “Disc”.
Touching once skips to the start of the
current file. Touching again will skip to the
previous file.
❒ You can also select a file by pressing the
or button.
❒ If you perform file search or fast forward/
rewind during “File”, the repeat play range
changes to “Folder”.
❒ When “Folder” is selected, it is not possible to
play back a subfolder of that folder.
(3) Hide the touch keys
Touching “Hide” clears the touch keys.
(2) Setting Up the DVD/DivX Player
Touch anywhere on the LCD screen, display
the touch keys again.
➲ “Setting Up the DVD/DivX Player” ➞ Page 126
88
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Touch “Search” and then touch desired
item.
Other functions (DivX)
When playing DivX, touch “Folder” (folder),
“File” (file) or “Time” (time).
Fast rewind or forward
Touching or to perform fast rewind or
forward.
If you keep touching or for five seconds,
the icon or changes into
When this happens, fast rewind/ fast forward
continues even if you release or . To
resume playback at a desired point, touch ,
or opposite to key pushed for five sec-
onds.
2 Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired number.
For titles and chapters
or
.
• To select 3, touch 3.
• To select 10, touch 1 and 0 in order.
• To select 23, touch 2 and 3 in order.
For time (time search)
• To select 21 minutes 43 seconds, touch 2, 1,
4 and 3 in order.
❒ You can also perform fast rewind/fast forward
by holding the or button on the hard-
ware.
• To select 1 hour 11 minutes, convert the
time into 71 minutes 00 seconds and touch
7, 1, 0 and 0 in order.
❒ To cancel the input numbers, touch “Clear”.
Frame-by-frame playback
This lets you move ahead one frame at a time dur-
ing playback.
3 While the input number is displayed,
touch “Enter”.
This starts playback from the selected scene.
1 Touch during playback.
Each time you touch , you move ahead one
frame.
Changing audio system during play-
back (Multi-audio)
With DivX featuring multi-audio recordings, you
can switch between audio systems during play-
back.
To return to normal playback, touch .
❒ With some discs, images may be unclear
during frame-by-frame playback.
1 Touch “Audio” during playback.
Each time you touch “Audio” switches
between audio mode.
Slow motion playback
This lets you slow down playback speed.
1 Keep touching until
is displayed
❒ Display indications such as Dolby D and
M ch indicate the audio system recorded
on the DivX file. Depending on the setting,
playback may not be with the same audio
system as the one indicated.
❒ Touching “Audio” during fast forward/fast
rewind, pause or slow motion playback
returns you to normal playback.
during playback.
The icon
is displayed, forward slow
motion playback begins.
To return to normal playback, touch .
❒ There is no sound during slow motion play-
back.
❒ With some discs, images may be unclear
during slow motion playback.
❒ Reverse slow motion playback is not possi-
ble.
Changing the subtitle during playback
(Multi-subtitle)
With DivX featuring multi-subtitle recordings, you
can switch between subtitles during playback.
Searching for a playback location
When playing back DivX, you can search for a
specific folder, file or time to begin playback.
1 Touch “S.Title” during playback.
Each time you touch “S.Title” switches
between subtitle.
❒ Time search and file search are not possible
when disc playback has been stopped.
❒ Touching “S.Title” during fast forward/
fast rewind, pause or slow motion playback
returns you to normal playback.
89
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ When using DivX, you can switch between
showing or hiding the subtitles while a
subtitle file is displayed. This switches the
subtitles while displaying subtitles in a
DivX file.
Radio
Listening to the radio
(6) (7)
®
Playing DivX VOD content
Some DivX VOD (video on demand) content may
only be playable a fixed number of times.
When you load a disc containing this type of DivX
VOD content, the remaining number of plays is
shown on-screen and you then have the option of
playing the disc (thereby using up one of the
remaining plays), or stopping. If you load a disc
that contains expired DivX VOD content (for
Rental expired is displayed.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
❒ If your DivX VOD content allows an unlimited
number of plays, then you may load the disc
into your player and play the content as often
as you like, and no message will be displayed.
(5)
❒ In order to play DivX VOD content on this unit,
you first need to register the unit with your
DivX VOD content provider. For information
about your registration code, refer to Display-
ing your DivX® VOD registration code on page
128.
These are the basic steps necessary to operate
the radio.
➲ More advanced radio operation ➞ Page 91
(1) Source icon
(2) Band indicator
❒ DivX VOD content is protected by a DRM (Dig-
ital Rights Management) system. This
restricts playback of content to specific, regis-
tered devices.
(3) Preset number indicator
(4) Frequency indicator
(5) Preset list or Detail information display
(6) LOCAL indicator
1 If the message is displayed after loading
a disc containing DivX VOD content,
touch “Play”.
(7) STEREO indicator
Playback of the DivX VOD content will start.
❒ Touch “Next” or “Previous” to switch
between files.
❒ If you do not want to play the DivX VOD
content, touch “Stop”.
1 Touch “RADIO” in the AV Source screen
to select the radio.
➲ “Selecting an AV source” ➞ Page 32
2 Touch “Band” to select a band.
Touch “Band” repeatedly until the desired
band is displayed, FM1, FM2, FM3 for FM or
AM.
3 To perform manual tuning, touch
or
briefly.
The frequencies move up or down step by
step.
90
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 To perform seek tuning, keep touching
or for about one second and
release.
Storing and recalling broadcast
frequencies
If you touch any of the preset tuning keys P1
(PRESET 1) — P6 (PRESET 6) you can easily store
up to six broadcast frequencies for later recall
with the touch of a key.
The tuner will scan the frequencies until a
broadcast strong enough for good reception
is found.
You can cancel seek tuning by touching either
or
briefly.
If you keep touching
or
you can
skip broadcasting stations. Seek tuning starts
as soon as you release the keys.
Switching between the detail
information display and the pre-
set list display
Preset tuning keys (P1 — P6)
You can switch the left side of the basic screen
according to your preference.
1 When you find a frequency that you want
to store in memory, keep touching a pre-
set tuning key P1 — P6 until the preset
number (e.g., P.CH 1) stops flashing.
The selected radio station frequency has been
stored in memory.
1 Touch “Preset” (or “Detail”).
Each touch of “Preset” (or “Detail”) changes
the detail information display or preset list dis-
play.
❒ Up to 18 FM stations, 6 for each of the
three FM bands, and 6 AM stations can be
stored in memory.
Detail information display
2 The next time you touch the same preset
tuning key P1 — P6, the radio station fre-
quency is recalled from memory.
❒ You can also use and to recall radio
stations frequencies assigned to preset
tuning keys P1 — P6.
Advanced radio operation
Preset list display
(1)
(1) Function display
➲ How to display the Function menu ➞
Page 79 to 80
91
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Storing the strongest broadcast
frequencies
BSM (best stations memory) lets you automati-
cally store the six strongest broadcast frequen-
cies under preset tuning keys P1 — P6 and once
stored there you can tune in to those frequencies
with the touch of a key.
1 Touch “BSM” in the Function menu.
2 Touch “Start” to turn BSM on.
BSM begins to flash. While BSM is flashing
the six strongest broadcast frequencies will
be stored under preset tuning keys P1 — P6
in order of their signal strength. When fin-
ished, BSM stops flashing.
To cancel the storage process, touch “Stop”.
❒ Storing broadcast frequencies with BSM
may replace broadcast frequencies you
have saved using P1 — P6.
Tuning in strong signals
Local seek tuning lets you tune in only those
radio stations with sufficiently strong signals for
good reception.
1 Touch “Local” in the Function menu.
2 Touch “On” to turn local seek tuning on.
To turn local seek tuning off, touch “Off”.
3 Touch or to set the sensitivity.
There are four levels of sensitivity for FM and
two levels for AM:
FM: 1 — 2 — 3 — 4
AM: 1 — 2
The FM “4” (AM “2”) setting allows reception
of only the strongest stations, while lower set-
tings let you receive progressively weaker sta-
tions.
92
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 7
Using the AV Source (Pioneer AV Equipment)
When Pioneer audio equipment is connected to
the navigation system using IP-BUS, such equip-
ment can be operated from the navigation sys-
tem.
When reading this chapter, please also refer to
the operation manual of the AV equipment con-
nected to the navigation system.
(3) Title/Folder number indicator
(4) Chapter/Track number indicator
(5) Play time indicator
(6) Repeat indicator
(7) Disc number list
(8) File type indicator
When playing a ROM, the file type indicator is
displayed.
Multi-DVD Player
1 “AV1 Input” is set to M-DVD.
Playing a disc
➲ “Setting the video input” ➞ Page 131
DVD-Video
2 Touch “M-DVD” in the AV Source screen
to select the multi-DVD player.
(1)
(2)
(3)(6) (4)
(5)
➲ “Selecting an AV source” ➞ Page 32
(8)
3 Touch the screen to display the touch
panel keys.
the disc you want to play.
(7)
Operations and Functions
Touch key operations and functions are basically
the same as those for the built-in DVD player.
For detail, refer to following contents.
You can use the navigation system to control a
DVD player or multi-DVD player (e.g. XDV-P6),
which is sold separately. For details concerning
operation, refer to the DVD player’s or multi-DVD
player’s operation manual. This section provides
information on DVD operations with the naviga-
tion system that differs from operations
Operating a DVD-V
➲ “Touch key operation (DVD-V)” ➞ Page 82
described in the DVD player’s or multi-DVD
player’s operation manual.
➲ “Operation using the Function menu (DVD-V)”
➞ Page 83
❒ This unit does not have ITS playlist and disc
➲ “Other functions (DVD-V)” ➞ Page 83
title functions.
❒ Direct touch control is not available.
❒ This unit cannot display the text information
recorded on a CD TEXT disc playing on the
optional DVD player.
❒ When you reproduce reverse slow motion, use
DVD player’s or multi-DVD player’s remote
control.
(1) Source icon
❒ “B.Mark”, “Disp”, “Search” is not displayed.
(2) Disc number indicator
Shows the number of the disc currently playing
when using a multi-DVD player.
93
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
: Track title
: Artist
: Album title
Operating a CD/ROM
➲ “Touch key operation (CD, ROM)” ➞ Page 85
➲
“Operation using the Function menu (CD,
❒ The “–” mark is displayed if there is no corre-
ROM)” ➞ Page 87
sponding information.
❒ AAC files cannot be played in XDV-P6.
(8) Repeat/Random/Scan indicator
The marks shown below indicate the current play-
back status.
❒ “Shuffle All”,“List or Detail”,
,
are not displayed.
and repeat range: Displays the repeat range
: Random
: Scan
USB
Operating the USB portable
audio player/USB memory
1 Touch “USB” in the AV Source screen to
select the USB.
➲ “Selecting an AV source” ➞ Page 32
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
2 Touch or to select a folder
(6)
❒ Playback is carried out in order of file number.
Folders are skipped if they contain no files. (If
folder 001 (ROOT) contains no files, playback
commences with folder 002.)
3 To skip back or forward to another com-
pressed audio file, briefly touch or
.
(7)
(8)
You can control a USB portable audio player/USB
memory by combining the USB adapter (e.g. CD-
UB100) (sold separately) to the navigation sys-
tem. For details concerning operation, refer to the
USB adapter’s operation manual.
4 To perform fast forward or rewind, keep
touching or .
Displaying text information
The operation is the same as that of the built-in
DVD drive.
❒ Optimum performance of this unit may not be
obtained depending on the connected USB
portable audio player/USB memory.
➲ “Displaying text information” ➞ Page 86
❒ You can listen to songs by connecting a USB
portable audio player/USB memory that is
USB Mass Storage Class compliant. For
details about the supported USB memory,
refer to USB adapter's operation manual.
❒ Genre and Year are not displayed.
❒ If the characters recorded on the audio file are
not compatible with this navigation system,
those characters will not be displayed.
(1) Source icon
Switching between the detail
information display and the list
display
You can switch the left side of the basic screen
according to your preference.
(2) Folder number indicator
(3) Track number indicator
(4) Play time indicator
(5) Current folder name indicator
(6) File type indicator
(7) Detail information display
Displays the track title, artist and album title.
94
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Touch “List” (or “Detail”).
1 Touch “Repeat” in the Function menu.
Each touch of “Repeat” changes the settings
as follows:
Each touch of “List” (or “Detail”) changes the
list display or detail information display.
Detail information display
• All — Repeat all files in the USB portable
audio player/USB memory.
• Track — Repeat just the current track
• Folder — Repeat the current folder
play, the repeat play range changes to All.
❒ If you perform track search or fast forward/
rewind during Track, the repeat play
range changes to Folder.
Playing tracks in a random order
Random play lets you play back tracks in a ran-
List display
dom order within the repeat range All or Folder.
1 Select the repeat range.
➲ “Repeating play” ➞ Page 95
2 Touch “Random” in the Function menu.
Touching “Random” switches between “On”
and “Off”.
Tracks will play in a random order within the
Viewing contents of upper folder
Touching
to display contents of the
upper folder.
Scanning folders and tracks
❒ If the current folder is the ROOT folder,
When the repeat play range is set to Folder, the
beginning of each track on the selected folder
plays for about 10 seconds. When the repeat play
USB portable audio player/USB memory are
played for about 10 seconds.
is not displayed.
Advanced USB operation
1 Select the repeat range.
➲ “Repeating play” ➞ Page 95
2 Touch “Scan” in the Function menu.
Touching “Scan” switches between “On” and
“Off”.
(1)
The first 10 seconds of each track of the cur-
rent folder (or the first track of each folder) is
played.
(1) Function display
➲ How to display the Function menu ➞
Page 79 to 80
3 When you find the desired track (or
folder) touch “Scan” to turn scan play off.
❒ After track or folder scanning is finished,
normal playback of the tracks will begin
again.
Repeating play
There are three repeat play ranges for the USB
portable audio player/USB memory: All (repeat
all files), Track (repeat one track) and Folder
(repeat folder).
95
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
— Using the MyMix function
— Using the direct traffic announcement
function
— Selecting a channel from the XM channel
list display
XM Tuner
Listening to XM Satellite Radio
ALL CH mode
(1)
(2) (5) (3)
(4)
❒ The following functions are not available on
the GEX-P900XM.
(6)
— Using the MyMix function
— Using the direct traffic announcement
function
— Selecting a channel from the XM channel
list display
— Selecting an XM channel directly
(7)
(1) Source icon
CATEGORY mode
(2) XM band indicator
(3) XM preset number indicator
(4) XM channel number indicator
(5) XM channel select mode indicator
Shows what channel select mode has been
selected. You can select a channel from all chan-
select a channel from a selected category in
CATEGORY mode.
(8)
You can use the navigation system to control an
XM satellite digital tuner (e.g. GEX-P10XMT),
which is sold separately.
Page 97
For details concerning operation, refer to the XM
tuner’s operation manuals. This section provides
information on XM operations with navigation
system which differs from that described in the
XM tuner’s operation manual.
(6) XM channel category or XM channel
information
(7) Detailed information or preset list display
(8) Category icon
➲ “Switching between the detailed information
Only the logo data that is contained in the naviga-
tion DVD Map Disc can be displayed for each
channel. The icon of a newly established channel
that is not contained in the disc cannot be dis-
played. When no icon can be displayed, the fol-
lowing substitute icon is displayed.
display and the preset list display” ➞ Page 97
1 Touch “XM” in the AV Source screen to
select the XM.
➲ “Selecting an AV source” ➞ Page 32
2 Touch “Band” to select an XM band.
Touch “Band” repeatedly until the desired XM
band is displayed: XM1, XM2 or XM3.
Substitute icon
❒ The logo data is not displayed during the
memory navi mode.
3 To perform tuning, touch
The channels move up or down step by step. If
you keep touching or , you can
or
.
❒ The following functions are not available on
the GEX-P10XMT, GEX-P920XM.
increase or decrease channel number contin-
uously. You can also perform manual tuning
by pressing the or button.
— Switching the XM display
❒ The following functions are not available on
the GEX-P910XM.
96
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ You can also perform tuning within
selected channel category.
Preset list display
(e.g. ALL CH mode)
➲ “Selecting a channel in the channel cate-
gory” ➞ Page 98
Switching the XM channel
select mode
You can switch modes between the two methods
for selecting and listing channels.
ALL CH Mode (or CH NUMBER Mode):
You can select a channel from all channels.
CATEGORY Mode:
Switching the XM display
1 Touch “Disp”.
Each touch of “Disp” changes the informa-
tion as follows:
You can select a channel within the selected cat-
egory.
GEX-P900XM:
1 Touch “Mode” to select the desired chan-
nel select mode.
Channel number — Channel name — Artist
name/feature — Song/program title — Infor-
mation
Touch “Mode” repeatedly to switch between
the two modes.
GEX-P910XM:
Channel name — Artist name/feature —
Song/program title — Channel category
Switching between the detailed
information display and the pre-
set list display
You can switch the left side of the basic screen
according to your preference.
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
If you touch any of the preset tuning keys Preset
1 (or P1) — Preset 6 (or P6) you can easily store
up to six broadcast stations for later recall with
the touch of a key.
1 Touch “Detail” (or “Preset”).
Each touch of “Detail” (or “Preset”) changes
the detail information display or preset list dis-
play.
1 Select the channel that you want to store
in memory.
Detail information display
(e.g. ALL CH mode)
2 Touch “Preset” to display the preset list.
3 Keep touching a preset tuning key Preset
1 (or P1) — Preset 6 (or P6) until the XM
preset number (e.g., P.CH 1) stops flash-
ing.
The number you have touched will flash in the
XM preset number indicator and then remain
lit. The selected station has been stored in
memory.
The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key Preset 1 (or P1) — Preset 6 (or P6)
the station is recalled from memory.
❒ Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three XM
bands can be stored in memory.
97
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ You can also touch
or
to
2 Touch the desired channel that you want
to listen to.
recall stations assigned to preset tuning
keys Preset 1 (or P1) — Preset 6 (or P6)
in the detailed information display when
the “ALL CH (or CH NUMBER)” mode is
selected.
Selecting a channel in the chan-
nel category
Press or to switch to the next page or the
previous page.
1 Touch “Mode” to select the CATEGORY
mode.
❒ In the CATEGORY mode, touch
or
to switch to another category.
2 Touch
or
to select the
desired category.
Selecting an XM channel
directly
❒ You can also select the category by press-
ing the or button.
You can select an XM channel directly by enter-
ing the desired channel number.
3 Touch
or
to select the
desired channel within the selected cate-
gory.
1 Touch “Direct”.
❒ When using the GEX-P10XMT or
GEXP920XM, press and hold the or
button to continuously move up or
down the channels in the category.
2 Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired channel
number.
To cancel the input numbers, touch “Clear”.
3 While the input number is displayed,
touch “Enter”.
Selecting a channel from the XM
channel list display
The entered XM channel is selected.
The list content can be switched so you can
search for the track you want to listen to not only
by the channel name but also by the artist name
or song title.
4 Touch “Back”.
You can return to the previous display.
Using the MyMix function
❒ The channel list shows all the channels dur-
ing the “ALL CH” mode, and the channels
included in the selected category during the
“CATEGORY” mode. To switch the channel
mode, touch “Mode”.
The MyMix function memorizes the song title and
artist name of the song currently being received.
When a track that matches the memorized song
title and artist name is being broadcast on a sta-
tion other than the one you are listening to, you
will be alerted, and you can switch the station to
listen to that song.
1 Touch “List”.
The XM channel list appears in the display.
Each touch of “List” changes the settings as
follows:
❒ A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only the
song title and the artist name are memorized.
Detail information display or Preset list
display — Ch Name List (Channel name) —
Song Title List (Song title) — Artist Name
List (Artist name)
Memorizing the song title and the artist
name of a song
The song title and artist name of the song you are
listening to can be memorized.
98
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Touch “Memo”.
Calling up the memorized traffic chan-
nel
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to are memorized, and a confir-
mation message appears.
1 Touch “TRFC”.
❒ You can also perform this operation by
touching “TRAFFIC” in the AV source
screen.
❒ Up to 12 song titles and artist names can be
memorized. Trying to save more than 12
tracks will overwrite old ones.
❒ You can call up a traffic channel from
sources other than XM.
❒ To cancel traffic announcement, touch
TRFC Off.
❒ You cannot memorize the song title or the art-
ist name when “– – – – – – – –” is displayed on
the title information.
❒ You cannot memorize the song title or the art-
ist name of the channel 000.
Display the Radio ID
❒ There is a possibility the memorized title is not
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is displayed.
displayed correctly.
1 Touch “Direct”.
When the memorized track is broadcast
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.
Touch “Yes” to switch to that station and listen to
that track.
2 Input “000” and then touch “Enter”.
If you select another channel, display of the
Radio ID is canceled.
Display of the Radio ID repeats displaying
“RADIO ID” and the ID code one after the
other.
❒ If the memorized track is not selected in the
MyMix list, no notification will be provided
even when that track is broadcast.
❒ You can also display the Radio ID to select
“RADIO ID” from channel category in the
CATEGORY mode.
❒ Notification may not be provided depending
on the situation of the Navigation System.
➲ “Setting the notification of memorized tracks”
➞ Page 100
Advanced XM tuner operation
❒ If there is slight difference between the mem-
orized title and the title of the track being
broadcast, no notification will be provided
even though they are the same song.
Using the direct traffic
announcement function
(1)
You can listen to a memorized traffic channel by
directly calling it up with the TRFC touch key.
(1) Function display
Memorize a traffic channel
1 Tune in to a Traffic channel.
➲ How to display the Function menu ➞
Page 79 to 80
2 Touch and hold “TRFC” for two seconds
or more.
The traffic channel will be memorized.
❒ The channels 000 and 001 can not be memo-
rized (although the channel 001 is the
default).
99
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the notification of memorized
tracks
SIRIUS Tuner
The list of song titles memorized for the MyMix
Function (MyMix list) is displayed. You can
change the notification setting when the track is
broadcast again. You can enable or disable notifi-
cation for each track.
Listening to SIRIUS
ALL CH mode
(1)
(2) (5) (3)
(4)
1 Touch “Memo” in the Function menu.
2 Touch the song title that you want to
exclude from the notification list.
The check mark is removed, and the song title
is excluded from the notification list.
(6)
Deleting the memorized tracks
You can delete each one of the memorized tracks
from the song title list.
CATEGORY mode
1 Touch “Memo” in the Function menu.
2 Touch the track you want to delete and
hold it for two seconds or more.
That track will be deleted from the song title
list.
(7)
❒ To delete all of the memorized tracks, then
“Delete All”.
You can use the navigation system to control a
Pioneer Sirius satellite digital tuner, which is sold
separately.
For details concerning operation, refer to the SIR-
IUS tuner’s operation manuals. This section pro-
vides information on SIRIUS operations with
navigation system which differs from that
described in the SIRIUS tuner’s operation man-
ual.
3 A message will appear asking you to con-
firm the deletion. Touch “Yes”.
Switching the alert setting
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at
the same time. This function is useful when you
want to turn alerts off temporarily without chang-
ing the condition of each memorized song.
❒ The following functions are not available on
1 Touch “Memo” in the Function menu.
the SIR-PNR1.
— Selecting team for game alert
— Displaying game information
— Using the song alert function
— Using the direct traffic announcement
function
2 Touch “Alert On” or “Alert Off”.
❒ Touch to toggle the selection.
— Using the MyMix function
(1) Source icon
(2) SIRIUS band indicator
(3) SIRIUS preset number indicator
(4) SIRIUS channel number indicator
100
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(5) SIRIUS channel select mode indicator
1 Touch “Detail” (or “Preset”).
the detail information display or preset list dis-
play.
Shows what channel select mode has been
selected. You can select a channel from all chan-
nels in ALL CH mode, and select a channel from
the selected category in CATEGORY mode.
Detail information display
(e.g. ALL CH mode)
➲ “Switching the SIRIUS channel select mode”
➞ Page 101
(6) Detailed information or preset list display
(7) Category icon
1 Touch “SIRIUS” in the AV Source screen
to select the SIRIUS tuner.
➲ “Selecting an AV source” ➞ Page 32
2 Touch “Band” to select a SIRIUS band.
Touch “Band” repeatedly until the desired SIR-
IUS band is displayed, SIRIUS1, SIRIUS2 or
SIRIUS3.
Preset list display
(e.g. ALL CH mode)
3 To perform tuning, touch
or
.
The channels move up or down. Channels that
cannot currently be selected are skipped, and
the next channel is selected. If you keep
touching
or
, you can increase
or decrease channel number continuously.
You can also perform manual tuning by press-
ing the or button.
SIRIUS channel information
Storing and recalling broadcast
stations
If you touch any of the preset tuning keys
Preset 1 — Preset 6 to easily store up to six
broadcast stations for later recall with the touch
of a key.
Switching the SIRIUS channel
select mode
You can switch modes between the two methods
for selecting and listing channels.
ALL CH Mode:
You can select a channel from all channels.
CATEGORY Mode:
You can select a channel within selected cate-
gory.
1 Select the channel that you want to store
in memory.
2 Touch “Preset” to display the preset list.
1 Touch “Mode” to select the desired chan-
nel select mode.
3 Keep touching a preset tuning key
Preset 1 — Preset 6 until the SIRIUS pre-
set number (e.g., P.CH 1) stops flashing.
The number you have touched will flash in the
SIRIUS preset number indicator and then
remain lit. The selected station has been
stored in memory.
Touch “Mode” repeatedly to switch between
the two modes.
Switching between the detailed
information display and the pre-
set list display
You can switch the left side of the basic screen
according to your preference.
The next time you touch the same preset tun-
ing key Preset 1 — Preset 6 the station is
recalled from memory.
101
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ Up to 18 stations, 6 for each of three SIR-
4 Touch “Back”.
IUS bands can be stored in memory.
You can return to the previous display.
❒ You can also touch
or
to
recall stations assigned to preset tuning
keys Preset 1 — Preset 6 in the detailed
information display when the “ALL CH”
mode is selected.
Using the MyMix function
The MyMix function memorizes the song title and
artist name of the song currently being received.
When a track that matches the memorized song
title and artist name is being broadcast on a sta-
tion other than the one you are listening to, you
will be alerted, and you can switch the station to
listen to that song.
Selecting a channel in the chan-
nel category
1 Touch “Mode” to select the CATEGORY
mode.
❒ A track itself is NOT downloaded BUT only the
song title and the artist name are memorized.
2 Touch
or
to select the
Memorizing the song title and the artist
name of a song
The song title and artist name of the song you are
listening to can be memorized.
desired category.
❒ You can also select the category by press-
ing the or button.
3 Touch
or
to select the
1 Touch “Memo”.
desired channel within the selected cate-
gory.
The song title and artist name of the song you
are listening to are memorized, and a confir-
mation message appears.
Switching the display
❒ Up to 12 song titles and artist names can be
memorized. Trying to save more than 12
tracks will overwrite old ones.
1 Touch “Disp”.
Touching “Disp” changes the information as
follows:
❒ You cannot memorize the song title or the art-
ist name when “– – – – – – – –” is displayed on
the title information.
Channel number — Channel name — Chan-
nel category — Artist name/feature — Song/
program title — Composer
❒ When using the SIR-PNR2, touch and hold
“Disp” to switch the information scroll On/
Off.
❒ You cannot memorize the song title or the art-
ist name of the channel 000.
❒ There is a possibility the memorized title is not
displayed correctly.
Selecting a SIRIUS channel
directly
You can select a SIRIUS channel directly by
entering the desired channel number.
When the memorized track is broadcast
A beep sounds, and a message is displayed.
Touch “Yes” to switch to that station and listen to
that track.
1 Touch “Direct”.
❒ If the memorized track is not selected in the
MyMix list, no notification will be provided
even when that track is broadcast.
2 Touch 0 — 9 to input the desired channel
number.
To cancel the input numbers, touch “Clear”.
❒ Notification may not be provided depending
on the situation of the Navigation System.
3 While the input number is displayed,
touch “Enter”.
➲ “Setting the notification of memorized tracks”
➞ Page 103
The entered SIRIUS channel is selected.
102
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ If there is slight difference between the mem-
orized title and the title of the track being
broadcast, no notification will be provided
even though they are the same song.
Advanced SIRIUS tuner opera-
tion
Using the direct traffic
announcement function
You can listen to a memorized traffic channel by
directly calling it up with the TRFC touch key.
(1)
Memorize a traffic channel
1 Tune in to a Traffic channel.
(1) Function display
➲ How to display the Function menu ➞
2 Touch and hold “TRFC” for two seconds
or more.
Page 79 to 80
Setting the notification of memorized
tracks
Display the song title list memorized for the
MyMix Function (MyMix list). You can change the
setting of the notification when the track is broad-
cast again. You can enable or disable notification
for each track.
The traffic channel will be memorized.
❒ The channels 000 and 001 can not be memo-
rized (although the channel 001 is the
default).
Calling up the memorized traffic chan-
nel
1 Touch “Memo” in the Function menu.
1 Touch “TRFC”.
❒ You can also perform this operation by
touching “TRAFFIC” in the AV source
screen.
2 Touch or to select the desired song.
3 Touch “On / Off” to turn “On” the setting.
❒ Touch “On / Off” again to turn the setting
“Off”.
❒ You can call up a traffic channel from
sources other than SIRIUS.
❒ To cancel traffic announcement, touch
“TRFC Off”.
Deleting the memorized tracks
You can delete each one of the memorized tracks
from the song title list.
Display the Radio ID
1 Touch “Memo” in the Function menu.
If you select CH: 000, the Radio ID is displayed.
2 Touch “Previous” or “NEXT” to select the
song title that you want to delete.
1 Touch “Direct”.
2 Input “000” and then touch “Enter”.
If you select another channel, display of the
Radio ID is canceled.
3 Touch “Delete”.
4 A message will appear asking you to con-
firm the deletion. Touch “Yes”.
Display of the Radio ID repeats displaying
“RADIO ID” and the ID code one after the
other.
Switching the alert setting
❒ You can also display the Radio ID to select
“RADIO ID” from channel category in the
CATEGORY mode.
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at
the same time. This function is useful when you
want to turn alerts off temporarily without chang-
ing the condition of each memorized song.
103
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Touch “Memo” in the Function menu.
3 Touch or to see if any other games
are playing.
2 Touch “Alert On” or “Alert Off”.
❒ Touch to toggle the selection.
Selecting teams for Game Alert
This navigation system can alert you when games
involving your favorite sports teams are about to
start. To use this function you need to store the
teams you like to follow in advance.
1 Touch “Game Alert” in the Function
menu.
2 Touch or to select the desired league.
3 Touch or to select the desired team.
4 Touch “On / Off” to turn the setting “On”.
❒ Touch “On / Off” again to turn the setting
“Off”.
Switching the Game Alert setting
You can enable or disable alerts for all items at
the same time. This function is useful when you
want to turn alerts off temporarily without chang-
ing the condition of each memorized team.
1 Touch “Game Alert” in the Function
menu.
2 Touch “Alert On” or “Alert Off”.
❒ Touch to toggle the selection.
Displaying Game Information
An alert will be displayed when a game with the
team you selected is about to start (or is currently
playing). You can also display game information
and changes to the broadcast channel.
❒ The Game Information function is available
when the Game Alert function is turned on.
1 Touch “Game Info” in the Function menu.
The game name and the broadcast channel
are displayed.
2 Touch “Tune To”.
❒ The game score will be updated automati-
cally.
❒ When no game is currently being broad-
cast, “NO GAME” is displayed.
104
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ Depending on the cellular phones featuring
Bluetooth technology, this indicator may not
show on the screen.
Hands-free Phoning
Hands-free phoning with cellu-
lar phones featuring Bluetooth
technology
(5) Missed call notice indicator
(6) Preset list display
❒ This navigation system’s phone call reception
is always on standby when the ignition switch
is set to ACC or ON.
(5)
(3) (4)
(1)
(2)
❒ The line-of-sight distance between this naviga-
tion system and your cellular phone must be
10 meters or less when sending and receiving
voice and data via Bluetooth technology. How-
ever, the transmission distance may become
shorter than the estimated distance, depend-
ing on the environment in use.
(6)
(The screen when the registered phone is
connected)
❒ When BT-TEL is selected as a source, equal-
izer curves are automatically changed to suit-
able settings for the phone source. When the
source is changed or returned to another
source, equalizer settings automatically
return to the original settings.
If you use a Bluetooth adapter (e.g. CD-
BTB200)(sold separately), you can connect a cel-
lular phone featuring Bluetooth wireless technol-
ogy to this unit for hands-free, wireless calls, even
while driving. For details concerning operation,
refer to the Bluetooth adapter’s operation man-
ual. This section provides brief information on the
hands-free phoning operations with this unit that
slightly differs or is cut short from the operations
described in the Bluetooth adapter’s operation
manual.
❒ When BT-TEL is selected as a source, func-
tions other than FAD/BAL are inoperable in
the Sound menu.
About the telephone source
standby mode
Once connected via Bluetooth wireless technol-
ogy, this navigation system will remain on tele-
phone source standby in the background while
the connection is sustained. This means you can
freely use the other functions of this system but
still be ready to receive a call.
❒ Since this unit is always on standby to con-
nect with your cellular phones via Bluetooth
wireless technology, using this unit without
running the engine can result in battery drain-
age.
(1) Source icon
(2) Device name indicator
(3) Signal level indicator
Setting up for hands-free phon-
ing
❒ If the signal is not available, (
) is dis-
Before you can use the hands-free phoning func-
tion you will need to set up the navigation system
for use with your cellular phone. This entails
establishing a Bluetooth wireless connection
between the system and your phone, registering
your phone with the system and adjusting the vol-
ume level.
played.
❒ Depending on the cellular phones featuring
Bluetooth technology, this indicator may not
show on the screen.
(4) Battery strength indicator
❒ Battery strength indicator may differ from the
actual battery strength.
105
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Connection
“ADD ”+””:
Adds or deletes + before the phone number.
Your phone should already be temporarily
connected. However, to make best use of the
functions, we recommend you register the
phone to the navigation system.
:
The input number is deleted letter by letter
from the end of the number. Continuing to
press deletes all of the numbers.
“Set”:
Change to the preset dial list screen. You can
assign the input number to the preset dial list.
➲ “Registering phone numbers to the preset
dial list” ➞ Page 107
➲ “Connecting a cellular phone” ➞ Page 109
2 Registration
Register the phone to take full advantage of
the features available with Bluetooth wireless
technology.
➲ “Registering your cellular phone” ➞
Page 111
“ESC”:
Return to the previous screen.
3 Adjust the volume level
4 Touch
to make a call.
❒ The estimated call time appears in the dis-
play.
Adjust the volume on your cellular phone and
the navigation system for comfort.
❒ The caller’s voice volume and ring volume
may vary depending on the type of the cel-
lular phone.
❒ The estimated call time in the display may
differ from the actual call time.
❒ If the difference between the ring volume
and caller’s voice volume is large, the over-
all volume level may become unstable.
this navigation system, make sure to
adjust the volume to a proper level.
❒ The name (if registered on the phone book)
Making a call by entering phone
number
The most basic way to make a call is to simply
dial the number.
and phone number are displayed.
5 Touch
to end the call.
Making a call from the history
list
The most recent calls made (dialled), received
and missed are stored in the call history list. You
can browse the call history list and call numbers
from it.
1 Touch “BT-TEL” in the AV Source screen
to select the cellular phone source.
➲ “Selecting an AV source” ➞ Page 32
2 Touch “Direct”.
The direct dial screen appears.
❒ Up to 12 calls are stored in each list.
3 Touch the number keys to enter the
phone number.
❒ The call history is stored only when the regis-
tered phone is connected to this navigation
system.
The input phone number is displayed below
the device name.
Input number
1 Touch “Log”.
The history list screen appears.
106
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Touch “Log” to change the list.
❒ Each touch of “Log” changes the lists as
follows:
❒ If a phone number other than registered in
the phone book is stored in the preset, “No
Name” will be displayed.
Missed calls list — Dialed calls list —
Received calls list
❒ Touching or switches to the next or
previous page in the list.
❒ If a phone book entry is edited after the
entry is stored in the preset dial list, the
edit will not be reflected to the list.
Calling a number in the preset dial list
3 Touch the desired phone number.
❒ Touching “ADD ”+”” adds or deletes +
before the phone number.
1 Touch one of preset keys P1 to P6.
The phone number registered to the selected
preset key is displayed.
❒ Each touch of “ABC/123” changes the dis-
play on the list between the name and the
phone number.
❒ If the name is not registered in the phone
book “No Name” will be displayed.
❒ If a incoming call number is not available
to display, “–” will be appear instead of the
number.
❒ Touching “ADD ”+”” adds or deletes +
before the phone number.
❒ Each touch of “ABC/123” changes the dis-
play on the list between the name and the
phone number.
2 Touch
to make a call.
❒ The estimated call time appears in the dis-
play.
4 Touch
to make a call.
❒ The estimated call time appears in the dis-
play.
❒ The estimated call time in the display may
differ from the actual call time.
❒ The estimated call time in the display may
differ from the actual call time.
3 Touch
to end the call.
Calling a number in the phone
5 Touch
to end the call.
Making a call from the preset
dial list
You can easily store up to 6 phone numbers and
later recall them with the touch of a preset key.
After finding the entry in the phone book you
want to call, you can select the number and make
the call.
❒ Before using this function, you need to trans-
fer the phone book in your cellular phone to
this navigation system.
Registering phone numbers to the pre-
set dial list
➲ “Transferring the phone book” ➞ Page 111
1 Select or input a phone number you want
to assign to the preset dial list.
1 Touch “PH.Book”.
The phone book list screen appears.
➲ Input the number directory ➞ Page 106
➲ Use the call history list ➞ Page 106
➲ Use the phone book ➞ Page 107
2 Touch and hold one of preset keys P1 to
P6 until the beep sounds.
The selected phone number is stored in mem-
ory. The next time you touch the same preset
keys, the phone number is recalled from
memory.
❒ Touching or switches to the next or
previous page in the list.
❒ You can search the phone book entry by
alphabet.
107
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
➲ “Searching the phone book entry by alpha-
The characters contained in “Next” in the
phone book edit screen are treated in the
same way as other alphabets when searching.
For example, when you use such as “A”, “a” or
“Å” the result to come out is the same.
bet” ➞ Page 108
2 Touch a phone book entry you want to
call.
The detailed list of the selected entry appears.
Making a call via voice recogni-
tion
If your cellular phone features voice recognition
technology, you can make a call by voice com-
mands.
3 Touch a number you want to call.
❒ Touching “ADD ”+”” adds or deletes +
before the phone number.
4 Touch
to make a call.
❒ The estimated call time appears in the dis-
play.
❒ This function is available only if your cellular
phone features voice recognition function.
❒ The estimated call time in the display may
differ from the actual call time.
❒ Operation varies depending on the type of
your cellular phone. For more details concern-
ing operation, refer to the instruction manual
of your cellular phone.
5 Touch
to end the call.
Searching the phone book entry by
alphabet
If there are many entries in the phone book list, it
can be useful to display them in the alphabetical
order for easier searching.
❒ This function can be operated only when the
connection is established by HFP (Hands Free
Profile).
1 Touch “Voice”.
Voice recognition function of the cellular
phone is now ready.
1 Touch “PH.Book”.
The phone book list screen appears.
❒ If your cellular phone does not feature
voice recognition function, No voice dial
appears in the display and operation is not
available.
2 Touch “Search”.
The phone book search screen appears.
2 Pronounce the name of your contact.
For more details concerning the voice recog-
nition operation, refer to your cellular phone’s
instruction manual.
Taking a phone call
3 Input the first letter of the entry in the
phone book list you want to search, then
touch “OK”.
Answering an incoming call
Even when a source other than BT-TEL is
selected, you can still answer an incoming call.
The phone book list screen reappears. The
search result is reflected, and the matched
entry in the phone book list is displayed.
❒ If no entry is found by the search, “No
Data” is displayed and “OK” is inactive.
❒ Touching “Clear” resets the search result
and displays the original phone book list.
1 When a call comes in, touch
.
The estimated call time appears in the display.
❒ The estimated call time in the display may
differ from the actual call time.
❒ You can set this navigation system to auto-
matically answering incoming calls.
➲ “Setting the automatic answering” ➞
Page 114
108
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 To end the call, touch
.
Advanced hands-free phoning
operation
❒ You may hear a noise when you disconnect
the phone.
❒ You can also perform this operation by
pressing the PHONE button.
Answering call waiting
If a call comes in while you are talking on the
phone, the number of the new caller appears in
the display to signal that you have call waiting.
You can put the first caller on hold while you
answer the call waiting.
(1)
(1) Function display
➲ How to display the Function menu ➞
1 Touch
to answer call waiting.
Page 79 to 80
2 Touching
hold.
switches between callers on
❒ When your cellular phone is not connected,
you cannot select “Phonebook Transfer” or
“Clear Memory”.
3 Touch
to end the call(s).
❒ You can only select “Echo Cancel” while
transmitting or receiving a call, or during con-
versation.
❒ Depending on the cellular phone that is
connected to this navigation system via
Bluetooth technology, the first caller will
be kept on hold.
Connecting a cellular phone
❒ You can also answer and end call waiting
by pressing the PHONE button.
To use a phone wirelessly with the navigation sys-
tem, it is necessary first to establish a connection
using Bluetooth wireless technology. There are
several ways you can do this.
Rejecting call waiting
If you would rather not interrupt your current call
to answer call waiting, you can reject it.
❒ Connection is normally established by HFP
(Hands Free Profile), which gives you full con-
trol of functions available on the telephone
source.
1 Touch
❒ You can also reject call waiting by pressing
and holding the PHONE button.
However, in some cases when you make con-
nection from your cellular phone, the connec-
tion may be made by HSP (Head Set Profile)
and several functions may not be available.
❒ The number you have rejected is not added
to the call history list.
Rejecting an incoming call
You can reject an incoming call.
wireless technology but not yet registered
with the navigation system. In this case it is
said to be temporarily connected, and the
available features are limited. To take full
advantage of all the features available, we rec-
ommend you register your phone with this
navigation system.
automatically rejecting all incoming calls,
refer to “Setting the automatic rejecting” ➞
Page 114
1 When a call comes in, touch
.
The call is rejected.
❒ You can also reject an incoming call by
pressing and holding the PHONE button.
❒ The rejected call is recorded in missed call
history list.
➲ “Making a call from the history list” ➞
Page 106
The limited features are;
• Preset dial list
• Call history list
• Phone book
➲ “Registering your cellular phone” ➞ Page 111
109
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ If “Auto Connect” is set to “On”, cellular
phone that has already been registered is con-
nected automatically.
1 Touch “Phone Connect” in the Function
menu.
The phone connection menu screen appears.
➲ “Setting the automatic connection” ➞
2 Touch “Search”.
Page 114
When available cellular phones featuring
Bluetooth wireless technology are found,
device names are displayed.
Using a cellular phone to initiate a con-
nection
Putting the navigation system in Connection
open mode allows you to establish a Bluetooth
wireless connection from your cellular phone.
❒ While Searching, “Search” is flash in the
display.
❒ If the navigation system fails to find any
available cellular phones, Phone Not
Found is displayed.
❒ Touching “Phone Name” changes the list
address.
1 Touch “Phone Connect” in the Function
menu.
The phone connection menu screen appears.
3 Touch a device name you want to con-
nect.
Connection to the cellular phone starts. When
the connection is established, the device
name of the connected cellular phone is dis-
played.
❒ To complete the connection, you may need
to enter the PIN code (0000) on your cellu-
lar phone.
2 Touch “Connection Open”.
“Pairing” is flash in the display.
3 Use a cellular phone to connect to the
navigation system.
➲ “Editing the PIN code” ➞ Page 129
Connection to the cellular phone starts. When
the connection is established, the device
name of the connected cellular phone is dis-
played.
❒ Operation varies depending on the type of
your cellular phone. Refer to the instruc-
tion manual that came with your cellular
phone for detailed instructions.
❒ To complete the connection, please check
the device name (Pioneer BT unit2) and
enter the PIN code (0000) on your cellular
phone.
Connecting to a registered cellular
phone
Once your phone is registered with the navigation
system, it is a simple matter to establish a Blue-
tooth wireless connection when a registered
phone is within range.
1 Touch “Phone Connect” in the Function
menu.
The phone connection menu screen appears.
2 Touch “Direct Connect”.
The registered phone list is displayed.
➲ “Editing the PIN code” ➞ Page 129
3 Touch a device name you want to con-
nect.
Searching for available cellular phones
You can have the navigation system search for
any available phones in the area that have Blue-
tooth wireless technology, then select which one
you want to connect to from a list displayed
onscreen.
Connection to the cellular phone starts. When
the connection is established, the device
name of the connected cellular phone is dis-
played.
110
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Touch “Phone Name”.
Registering your cellular phone
The 12-digit hexadecimal string is displayed.
❒ Without connecting, you cannot select
“Phone Name”. Connect your cellular
phone first.
You can register a phone that is temporarily con-
nected to the navigation system in order to take
full advantage of the features available with Blue-
tooth wireless technology. A total of five phones
can be registered: three user cellular phones and
two guest phones. When registered as a user
phone, all the possible functions are available for
use. When registered as a guest phone, some
functions are limited.
➲ “Connecting a cellular phone” ➞ Page 109
Disconnecting a cellular phone
When you are done using your phone with the
navigation system, you can close the Bluetooth
wireless connection.
1 Touch “Phone Register” in the Function
menu.
1 Touch “Phone Connect” in the Function
menu.
The phone register screen appears.
The phone connection menu screen appears.
(1)
(2)
(3)
(4)
(5)
2 Touch “Disconnect”.
After the disconnection is completed, No
Connection is displayed.
Deleting a registered phone
(1) 1:
User phone 1
(2) 2:
User phone 2
(3) 3:
If you no longer need to use a registered phone
with the navigation system, you can delete it from
the registration assignment to free it for another
phone.
❒ If a registered phone is deleted, all the phone
book entries and call history lists correspond
to the phone will be also cleared.
User phone 3
(4) G:
Guest phone 1
(5) G:
1 Touch “Phone Register” in the Function
menu.
Guest phone 2
The phone register screen appears.
2 Touch and hold “1: ” — “3: ” or “G: ”.
When the registration is completed, the
device name is displayed.
2 Touch “Delete” on the right-hand side of
the device name of the cellular phone you
want to delete.
Displaying BD (Bluetooth
Device) address
Each device featuring Bluetooth technology is
allocated a unique 48-bit device address. It con-
sists of a 12-digit of hexadecimal string. This navi-
gation system can display the BD address of your
registered cellular phone featuring Bluetooth
technology.
The deletion confirmation message appears.
3 Touch “Yes”.
The registered phone is deleted.
❒ When not deleting a registered phone,
select “No”.
Transferring the phone book
You can transfer the numbers in a registered user
phone’s address book into the phone book.
1 Touch “Phone Connect” in the Function
menu.
❒ If a guest phone is connected to this naviga-
tion system via Bluetooth technology, this
function cannot be selected.
The phone connection menu screen appears.
111
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ With some cellular phones, it may not be pos-
sible to transfer the entire phone book at
once. In this case, transfer addresses one at a
time from your phone book using your cellular
phone.
Changing the phone book dis-
play order
You can choose to display the phone book sorted
alphabetically by first name or family name.
❒ This function is available while the registered
❒ The phone book can hold a total of 500
entries;
phone is connected.
User phone 1: 300 entries
User phone 2: 150 entries
User phone 3: 50 entries
1 Touch “Phonebook Name View” in the
Function menu.
Touching “Phonebook Name View”
switches between “Invert” and “Original”.
❒ If a phone book entry is edited, the display
order of first name and family name will
not be changed.
❒ Each entry can hold up to 5 phone numbers.
❒ Depending on the cellular phone that is con-
nected to this navigation system via Bluetooth
technology, this navigation system may not be
able to display the phone book correctly.
(Some characters may be garbled.)
❒ With some cellular phones, this feature
may not be possible.
❒ If the phone book in the cellular phone con-
tains image data, phone book may not be cor-
rectly transferred.
You can edit the phone numbers or names regis-
tered in the phone book.
1 Touch “Phonebook Transfer” in the Func-
tion menu.
1 Touch “PH.Book”.
The phonebook transfer screen appears.
❒ Hands-free phoning connection is discon-
nected to establish the connection for
phone book transfer. The navigation sys-
tem now ready to be transferred the phone
book from the phone.
The phone book list screen appears.
❒ Touching or switches to the next or
previous page in the list.
❒ You can search the phone book alphabeti-
cally.
➲ “Searching the phone book entry by alpha-
bet” ➞ Page 108
2 Use cellular phone to perform phone book
transfer.
2 Touch a phone book entry you want to
edit.
The phone book in the cellular phone is trans-
ferred to the navigation system. Transfer
progress is displayed.
The detailed list of the selected entry appears.
3 Touch “Edit” on the right-hand side of the
phone number or the name of the informa-
tion you want to edit.
Number of completed transfers
Completed is displayed when the phone
book transfer is finished.
❒ If all the phone book entries are not trans-
ferred at a time, repeat Step 2 to transfer
the phone book entries one by one.
The phone number edit screen or the name
edit screen appears.
4 Input the text or number.
112
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Phone number edit screen
You can input numbers.
Clearing memory
You can clear the memory of each item that cor-
responds to the connected cellular phone: phone
book, dialled/received/missed call history list and
preset dials.
1 Touch “Clear Memory” in the Function
menu.
The clear memory screen appears.
“ADD ”+””:
Adds or deletes + before the phone number.
2 Touch “Clear” on the right-hand side of
the item that you want to clear memory
for.
:
The input number is deleted letter by letter
from the end of the numbers. Continuing to
press deletes all of the numbers.
“OK”:
The change is fixed, and the phone book edit
screen reappears.
Name edit screen
On this screen, you can select the following
items:
You can input letters or numbers.
Phonebook:
You can clear the registered phone book.
Dialled Calls:
You can clear the dialed call history list.
Received Calls:
You can clear the received call history list.
Missed Calls:
“Next”:
Each touch of the “Next” changes the charac-
ters that can be input as follows:
Upper case letters — lower case letters —
upper case symbols — lower case symbols
You can clear the missed call history list.
Preset Dials:
You can clear the registered preset dials.
❒ Touching “Clear” displays the confirma-
tion message for clearing the memory.
❒ Touching “Clear All” clears all the data
that correspond to the connected cellular
phone.
:
The input text is deleted letter by letter from
the end of the text. Continuing to press
deletes all of the text.
“OK”:
3 Touch “Yes”.
The change is fixed and the phone book edit
screen reappears.
Data on the selected item is cleared from this
navigation system’s memory.
❒
Each name can be input 16 characters long.
❒ If you do not want to clear memory that you
have selected, touch “No”.
113
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Setting the automatic answering Setting the automatic connec-
tion
If you set the automatic answering function on,
the navigation system automatically answers all
incoming calls.
When automatic connection is active the naviga-
tion system will automatically establish a connec-
tion with a registered phone when it comes into
1 Touch “Auto Answer” in the Function
range. Using this feature will release you from all
menu.
of the processes for establishing a connection.
Touching “Auto Answer” switches between
❒ With some cellular phones, it may not be pos-
“On” and “Off”.
sible to perform automatic connection.
Setting the automatic rejecting
If this function is on, the navigation system auto-
matically rejects all incoming calls.
❒ While you are operating in the function menu
of hands-free phoning, this unit does not ini-
tiate an automatic connection to your regis-
tered phone.
1 Touch “Refuse All Calls” in the Function
menu.
1 Touch “Auto Connect” in the Function
menu.
Touching “Refuse All Calls” switches
between “On” and “Off”.
❒ If both the automatic reject and automatic
answer functions are set to On, automatic
reject is prioritized and all incoming calls
are automatically rejected.
Touching “Auto Connect” switches between
“On” and “Off”.
❒ Automatic connection is performed in the
registration number order.
Echo canceling and noise reduc-
tion
When you are operating hands-free phoning in
the vehicle, you may hear an undesired echo.
This function reduces the undesired echo and
noise while you are doing hands-free phoning,
and maintains a certain sound quality.
❒ If the “Refuse All Calls” is set to “On”,
rejected incoming calls will not be stored
in the missed call list.
Setting a ring tone
The navigation system offers to turn the ring tone
for incoming calls on or off.
❒ The ring tone you select for this navigation
system has no effect on the ring tone used by
your phone. If you do not want your phone and
this navigation system to ring at the same
time, we recommend you turn the ring tone
off for one or the other.
1 Touch “Echo Cancel”.
Touching “Echo Cancel” switches between
“On” and “Off”.
1 Touch “Ring Tone” in the Function menu.
Touching “Ring Tone” switches between
“On” and “Off”.
114
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Displays the song title, artist name and album
title.
iPod
You can control an iPod by combining the iPod
cable (e.g. CD-I200) (sold separately) to the navi-
gation system.
: Song title
: Artist name
: Album title
For details concerning operation, refer to the
iPod’s owner’s manual.
(7) Play time bar
Touch key operation (MUSIC)
Operating iPod
1 Connect the iPod to the navigation sys-
tem.
(1)
2 Touch “iPod” in the AV Source screen to
select the iPod.
➲ “Selecting an AV source” ➞ Page 32
track, touch or .
(2)(6)
(5)
(3), (7)
(4)
Touching skips to the start of the next
track. Touching once skips to the start of
the current track. Touching again will skip to
the previous track.
When the track with chapters played, touch-
ing skips to the start of the next chapter.
Touching once skips to the start of the
current chapter. Touching again will skip to
the previous chapter.
➲ “Advanced iPod operation” ➞ Page 117
❒ Some functions cannot be reproduced
depending on the generation of the iPod.
❒ If the authorisation error occurs when an iPod
with video compatibilities is connected to the
navigation system, the icon
played.
is dis-
➲ “Problems in the AV screen (during iPod play-
4 To perform fast backward or forward,
back)” ➞ Page 152
keep touching or .
❒ The and buttons on the hardware are
the same function as and in the
screen.
Browsing for a song
The operations of this navigation system for con-
trolling an iPod are designed to imitate iPod oper-
ation. This allows you to search and play songs as
you would with an iPod.
(1) Source icon
(2) Track number indicator
(3) Play time indicator
1 Touch one of the categories in which you
want to search for a song.
(4) Chapter indicator
When the source with chapters played, the
• Playlists (playlists)
• Genres (genres)
• Artists (artists)
• Albums (albums)
• Podcasts (podcasts)
indicator appears.
(5) Repeat/Shuffle indicator
The marks shown below indicate the current
playback status.
: All-tracks repeat
: One-track repeat
: Shuffle
(6) Song title, Artist name and Album title
indicator
115
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
The search screen is displayed.
2 Touch one of the categories that contains
the video you want to play.
❒ When connected to an iPod that can han-
dle podcasts, you can search by podcast.
❒ When you select Artists, Albums, or
Genres keep touching one of the list in the
category makes the songs in the list as a
playlist and start playing.
2 Touch the item you want to refine.
❒ Refine the item until the track title is dis-
played on the list.
3 Touch the screen to display to touch
panel keys.
3 From the track list, touch the track you
want to play.
❒ To go to the next track list, touch
.
❒
❒
To return to the previous track list, touch
.
When the iPod operation screen appears
after selecting a song, touch “MENU” to
display the previous playlist.
❒ To return to the category selection screen,
touch “Top Menu”.
Performing random play with
one touch
All of the selected songs can be played at ran-
dom by only touching one key.
❒
When the iPod operation screen appears
after selecting a video, touch “MENU” to dis-
play the previous playlist.
4 To skip back or forward to another video,
touch or .
1 Touch “Shuffle All”.
❒
To cancel the random play, switch
Touching skips to the start of the next
video. Touching once skips to the start of
the current video. Touching again will skip to
the previous video.
“Shuffle” to “Off” in the Function menu.
Touch key operation (VIDEO)
This navigation system can play video if an iPod
with video capabilities is connected.
When the video with chapters played, touch-
ing skips to the start of the next chapter.
Touching once skips to the start of the
current chapter. Touching again will skip to
the previous chapter.
❒ Change the video setting on the iPod so that
the iPod can output the video to an external
device, before you display the video screen.
❒ For details about the settings, refer to the
5 To perform fast forward or rewind, keep
touching or .
iPod’s owner’s manual.
If you keep touching or for five sec-
onds, fast rewind/ fast forward continues even
if you release or . To resume playback
at a desired point, touch , or .
1 Touch “VIDEO”.
Touch “MUSIC” in step 2 to return to the
music operation screen.
116
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Advanced iPod operation
If the video is compatible with wide screen for-
mat, set the Wide Screen setting to On in order
to view the video image in wide screen.
1 Touch “Wide Screen” in the Function
menu.
Touching “Wide Screen” switches between
“On” or “Off”.
(1)
❒ When you select the video after setting
“Wide Screen”, display size is changed.
(1) Function display
➲
How to display the Function menu
to 80
➞
Page 79
Turning on or off charging for
the iPod
The iPod charging setting can be turned on or off.
If the video from an iPod with video capabilities
seems fuzzy, turning off the charging setting may
improve the video quality.
Repeating play
There are two repeat play types for the iPod: One
(one-track repeat) and All (all-tracks repeat).
1 Touch “Repeat” in the Function menu.
Each touch of “Repeat” changes the settings
as follows:
1 Touch “iPod Charge” in the Function
menu.
Touching “iPod Charge” switches between
“On” or “Off”.
• One — Repeat just the current track
• All — Repeat all tracks in the selected list
Shuffle play
This function shuffles tracks or albums and plays
them in random order.
1 Touch “Shuffle” in the Function menu.
Each touch of “Shuffle” changes the settings
as follows:
• Off — Does not shuffle.
• Songs — Shuffles tracks.
• Albums — Shuffles albums.
❒ When you set “Albums”, the albums are
shuffled but the tracks in the album will
not be shuffled (The tracks in the album
will be played from the first track).
117
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ Information about songs (e.g. the elapsed
playing time, song title, song index, etc.) can-
not be displayed on this navigation system.
Bluetooth Audio
Listening to songs on BT Audio
(Bluetooth audio player)
❒ While you are listening to songs on your Blue-
tooth audio player, please refrain from operat-
ing your cellular phone as much as possible.
If you try operating on your cellular phone, the
signal from your cellular phone may cause a
noise on the song playback.
(1)
(2)
❒ When you are talking on the cellular phone
connected to this navigation system via Blue-
tooth wireless technology, the song playback
from your Bluetooth audio player connected
to this navigation system is muted.
If you connect a Bluetooth adapter (e.g.
CD-BTB200)(sold separately) to this unit, you can
control a Bluetooth audio player via Bluetooth
wireless technology. For details concerning oper-
ation, refer to the Bluetooth adapter’s operation
manual. This section provides brief information
on Bluetooth audio player operations with this
unit that slightly differs or is cut short from the
operations described in the Bluetooth adapter’s
operation manual.
❒ Even if you switch to another source while lis-
tening to a song on your Bluetooth audio
player, the playback of song continues to
elapse.
❒ Depending on the Bluetooth audio player you
connected to this navigation system, opera-
tions on this navigation system to control the
player may differ from those explained in this
manual.
❒ Even if your audio player does not contain a
Bluetooth module, you can still control it from
this unit via Bluetooth wireless technology. To
control your audio player by using this unit,
connect a product featuring Bluetooth wire-
less technology (available on the market) to
your audio player and connect Bluetooth
adapter (e.g. CD-BTB200) to this unit.
(1) Source icon
(2) Device name
Touching “Name” switches between equip-
ment name and BD address.
1 Touch “BT-AUDIO” in the AV Source
screen to select the Bluetooth audio
source.
❒ Depending on the Bluetooth audio player con-
nected to this navigation system, the available
operations with this navigation system are
limited to the following two levels:
➲ “Selecting an AV source” ➞ Page 32
❒ For this navigation system to control your
Bluetooth audio player it needs to estab-
lish a Bluetooth wireless connection.
(Refer to “Connecting a Bluetooth audio
player” on page 119.)
— Lower level: Only playing back songs on
your audio player is possible.
— Higher level: Playing back, pausing, select-
ing songs, etc., are possible (all the opera-
tions illustrated in this manual).
2 Touch .
Playback starts.
❒ Since there are a number of Bluetooth audio
players available on the market, operations
with your Bluetooth audio player using this
navigation system vary greatly in range.
Please refer to the instruction manual that
came with your Bluetooth audio player as well
as this manual while operating your player on
this navigation system.
3 To skip back or forward to another track,
touch or .
Touching skips to the start of the next
track. Touching once skips to the start of
the current track. Touching it again will skip to
the previous track.
118
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
4 To perform fast forward or reverse, keep
Disconnecting a Bluetooth
audio player
touching or .
5 To stop playback, touch .
1 Touch “Disconnect” in the Function
menu.
Pausing track playback
Pause lets you temporarily stop track playback.
After the disconnection is completed, No
Connection is displayed.
1 Touch .
Displaying BD (Bluetooth
Device) address
Play of the current track pauses.
❒ To resume playback at the same point that
you turned pause on, touch again.
1 Touch “Device Info” in the Function menu
Various information regarding the Bluetooth
wireless technology are displayed.
•
•
•
•
BD ADDRESS (system address)
SYSTEM NAME (system name)
SYSTEM VER. (version)
(1)
BT MODULE VER. (Bluetooth module ver-
sion)
(1) Function display
➲ How to display the Function menu ➞
Page 79 to 80
Connecting a Bluetooth audio
player
1 Touch “Connection Open” in the Function
menu to turn the connection open on.
Pairing is displayed. This navigation system
is now on standby for connection from Blue-
tooth audio player.
If your Bluetooth audio player is set ready for
Bluetooth wireless connection, the connec-
tion to this navigation system will be automat-
ically established.
❒ Before you can use audio players you may
need to enter the PIN code into this naviga-
tion system. If your player requires a PIN
code to establish a connection, look for the
code on the player or in its accompanying
documentation. Enter the PIN code refer-
ring to page 110.
119
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
External Unit
Operate the external unit by
using 1 KEY — 6 KEY
The external unit can be operated by transmitting
the operating commands set to 1 KEY — 6 KEY.
Operating the external unit
(1)
(2)
❒ Operation varies depending on the external
unit connected. (In some cases, the external
unit may not respond.)
1 Touch desired key (“1 KEY” — “6 KEY”)
to operate the external unit.
Operate the external unit by
using F1 — F4
The external unit can be operated by transmitting
the operating commands set to F1 — F4.
The term “external unit” refers to a Pioneer prod-
uct (such as one available in the future) that,
although incompatible as a source, enables con-
trol of basic functions by the navigation system.
Two external units can be controlled by the navi-
gation system. When two external units are con-
nected, the navigation system allocates them to
external unit 1 or external unit 2.
❒ The operating commands set to F1 — F4 vary
depending on the external unit.
❒ Some functions may not be used until you
For details concerning operation, refer to the
external unit’s operation manual. This section
provides information on external unit operations
with the navigation system that differ from those
described in the external unit’s operation man-
ual.
touch and hold the key.
1 Touch “F1” — “F4”.
The operation command is transmitted to the
external unit.
Switching the automatic and
manual function
You can turn automatic and manual function on
or off.
❒ Operation varies depending on the external
unit connected. (In some cases, the external
unit may not respond.)
(1) Source icon
You can switch between Auto and Manual func-
tions of the external unit connected.
Initially, this function is set to Auto.
(2) External unit indicator
1 Touch “EXT-1” or “EXT-2” in the AV
Source screen to select the external unit.
➲ “Selecting an AV source” ➞ Page 32
❒ Operating commands set for Auto and Man-
ual operations vary depending on the external
unit connected.
2 Touch any touch panel key to operate the
external unit.
1 Touch “A / M”.
Touching “A / M” switches between “Auto”
and “Manual”.
120
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
AV Input (AV)
• For safety reasons, visual images cannot
be viewed while your vehicle is in motion.
To view visual images, you must stop in a
(see page 13 Interlock for details).
Selecting AV as the source
1 Touch “AV-1” or “AV-2” in the AV Source
screen to select AV as the source.
➲ “Selecting an AV source” ➞ Page 32
❒ If you want to switch AV source, select
“Video” in “AV1 Input” or “AV2 Input”.
➲ “Setting the video input” ➞ Page 131
121
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
122
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Chapter 8
Customizing the AV Source Setting
Various settings are available with the audio
Using the equalizer
The equalizer lets you adjust the equalization to
match vehicle interior acoustic characteristics as
desired.
source according to your audiovisual requests.
This chapter describes the methods of changing
the various settings and how to set of the LCD
panel.
Recalling equalizer curves
Audio Adjustments
There are seven stored equalizer curves which
you can easily recall at any time. Here is a list of
the equalizer curves:
Introduction to audio adjust-
ments
Equalizer curve
S.Bass
S.Bass is a curve in which only low-pitched sound is
boosted.
Powerful
Powerful is a curve in which low-pitched and high-
pitched sounds are boosted.
Natural is a curve in which low-pitched and high-
pitched sounds are slightly boosted.
(1)
Vocal
Vocal is a curve in which the midrange, which is the
human vocal range, is boosted.
(1) Sound display
Shows the audio function names.
Flat
Flat is a flat curve in which nothing is boosted.
➲ How to display the Sound menu ➞ Page 79
Custom1
❒ Only when the subwoofer controller setting is
Preout Full, Non Fading will be displayed
instead of Sub Woofer.
Custom1 is an adjusted equalizer curve that you cre-
ate.
Custom2
Custom2 is an adjusted equaliser curve that you cre-
ate.
➲ “Setting the rear output and subwoofer con-
troller” ➞ Page 129
1 Touch “EQ Menu” in the Sound menu.
❒ When selecting the FM tuner as the source,
you cannot switch to “SLA”.
2 Select the desired equalizer curve.
❒ Custom1 and Custom2 are adjusted
equalizer curves.
❒ When Flat is selected, no supplement or
correction is made to the sound. This is
useful to check the effect of the equalizer
curves by switching alternatively between
Flat and a set equalizer curve.
123
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using balance adjustment
You can select a fader/balance setting that pro-
vides an ideal listening environment in all occu-
pied seats.
1 Touch “FAD/BAL” in the Sound menu.
When the rear output setting is Rear SP
Sub. W, Balance will be displayed instead of
FAD/BAL.
• Band:
You can select the equalizer band.
• Frequency:
You can select which frequency to be set as
the center frequency.
➲ “Setting the rear output and subwoofer
controller” ➞ Page 129
• Level:
balance.
You can select the decibel (dB) level of the
selected EQ.
• Q:
You can select the details of the curve charac-
teristics.
Each time you touch or moves the front/
rear speaker balance towards the front or the
rear.
Front:15 to Rear:15 is displayed as the front/
rear speaker balance moves from front to rear.
Both Front:0 and Rear:0 are the proper set-
ting when only two speakers are used.
When the rear output setting is Rear SP
Sub. W, you cannot adjust front/rear speaker
balance.
1 Touch “EQ Menu” in the Sound menu.
2 Touch “Customize”.
3 Touch or to select the equalizer band
to adjust.
Each time you touch or selects equalizer
bands in the following order:
Low — Mid — High
➲ “Setting the rear output and subwoofer
controller” ➞ Page 129
3 Touch or to adjust left/right speaker
balance.
4 Touch or to select the desired fre-
quency.
Each time you touch or moves the left/
right speaker balance towards the left or the
right.
Touch or until the desired frequency
appears in the display.
Low: 40 — 80 — 100 — 160 (Hz)
Mid: 200 — 500 — 1K — 2K (Hz)
High: 3.15K — 8K — 10K — 12.5K (Hz)
Left:9 to Right:9 is displayed as the left/right
speaker balance moves from left to right.
Adjusting equalizer curves
You can adjust the currently selected equalizer
curve setting as desired. Adjusted equalizer curve
settings are memorized in Custom1.
5 Touch or to adjust the level of the
equalizer band.
Each time you touch or increases or
decreases the level of the equalization band.
+12 to –12 is displayed as the level is
increased or decreased.
❒ If you make Custom2 adjustments, Custom2
curve is updated.
❒ You can adjust the center frequency, level and
the Q factor (curve characteristics) of each
currently selected curve band (Low/Mid/
High).
6 Touch or to select the desired Q fac-
tor.
Touch or until the desired Q factor
appears in the display.
Wide2 — Wide1 — Narrow1 — Narrow2
❒ If you make adjustments, Custom1 curve
is updated.
124
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Touch “Sub Woofer” in the Sound menu.
When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-
ting in Initial menu) is Full, you cannot select
“Sub Woofer”.
Setting the simulated sound
stage
You can select the desired effect from various
simulated sound stage, such as Music Studio or
Dynamic Theater. You can also adjust a listener
positioning effect.
➲ “Setting the rear output and subwoofer
controller” ➞ Page 129
2 Touch “On” to turn subwoofer output on.
Setting a stage that fits your image
1 Touch “Staging” in the Sound menu.
To turn subwoofer output off, touch “Off”.
3 Touch “Reverse” or “Normal” to select
the phase of subwoofer output.
2 Touch the desired stage setting.
❒ The “Living Room” setting that empha-
sizes midrange sound hardly has any
4 Touch “+” or “–” to adjust the output
level of the subwoofer.
effect near the maximum volume level.
❒ When you set staging other than “Off”, the
high pass filter (HPF) setting turns “Off”.
➲ “Using the high pass filter” ➞ Page 126
+6 to –6 is displayed as the level is increased
or decreased.
5 Touch or to select cut-off frequency.
Each time you touch or selects cut-off fre-
quencies in the following order:
Adjusting a position effect
You can select a listener position that you want to
make as the center of sound effects.
50 — 80 — 125 (Hz)
Only frequencies lower than those in the
selected range are output from the subwoofer.
1 Touch “Staging” in the Sound menu.
2 Touch “Position”.
Using non fading output
When the non fading output setting is on, the
audio signal does not pass through navigation
system’s low pass filter (for the subwoofer), but is
output through the RCA output.
3 Touch the desired position.
Adjusting loudness
Loudness compensates for deficiencies in the
low- and high-sound ranges at low volume.
1 Touch “Non Fading” in the Sound menu.
Only when Preout (the subwoofer controller
setting in Initial menu) is Full, you can select
“Non Fading”.
1 Touch “Loudness” in the Sound menu.
2 Touch “On” to turn loudness on.
➲ “Setting the rear output and subwoofer
controller” ➞ Page 129
To turn loudness off, touch “Off”.
3 Touch or to select a desired level.
Each time you touch or selects level in
the following order:
2 Touch “On” to turn non fading output on.
To turn non fading output off, touch “Off”.
3 Touch “+” or “–” to adjust the output
level of the non fading.
Low — Mid — High
+6 to –6 is displayed as the level is increased
or decreased.
Using subwoofer output
The navigation system is equipped with a sub-
woofer output which can be turned on or off.
❒ When the subwoofer output is on, you can
adjust the cut-off frequency, the output level
and the phase of the subwoofer.
125
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Using the high pass filter
Setting Up the DVD/DivX Player
When you do not want low sounds from the sub-
woofer output frequency range to play from the
front or rear speakers, turn the HPF (high pass
filter) on. Only frequencies higher than those in
the selected range are output from the front or
rear speakers.
Configure the DVD/DivX player.
DVD/DivX Setup adjustments
1 Touch “HPF” in the Sound menu.
2 Touch “On” to turn high pass filter on.
To turn high pass filter off, touch “Off”.
(1)
3 Touch or to select cut-off frequency.
Each time you touch or selects cut-off fre-
quencies in the following order:
(1) DVD/DivX Setup menu display
50 — 80 — 125 (Hz)
1 Play the disc that contains DVD-Video or
DivX.
When Preout (the subwoofer controller set-
ting in Initial menu) is Sub. W, the HPF
function is effective for front speakers only.
2 Press the MENU button to change to the
AV MENU.
Adjusting source levels
3 Touch “Function”.
SLA (source level adjustment) lets you adjust the
volume level of each source to prevent radical
changes in volume when switching between
sources.
• Settings are based on the FM tuner volume
level, which remains unchanged.
4 Touch “DVD/DivX Setup”.
5 Touch the desired function.
Setting the language
1 Compare the FM tuner volume level with
the level of the source you wish to adjust.
You can set a desired subtitle, audio and menu
language. If the selected language is recorded on
the disc, subtitles, audio and menu are displayed
in that language.
2 Touch “SLA” in the Sound menu.
3 Touch “+” or “–” to adjust the source vol-
ume.
title Language”, “Audio Language” or
“Menu Language”.
+4 to –4 is displayed as the source volume is
increased or decreased.
Sources are set to same source level adjust-
ment volume automatically.
Each language menu is displayed and the cur-
rently set language is selected.
• CD, ROM, DivX, S-DVD and M-DVD
• EXT-1and EXT-2
• AV-1 and AV-2
2 Touch the desired language.
When you select “Others”, a language code
input display is shown. Input the four digit
code of the desired language then touch
“Enter”.
• XM and SIRIUS
➲ “Language Code Chart for DVD” ➞
Page 134
❒ If the selected language is not recorded on
the disc, the default language specified on
the disc is output and displayed.
126
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ You can also switch the subtitle and audio
language by touching “S.Title” or “Audio”
during playback.
➲ “Changing the subtitle language during
playback (Multi-subtitle)” ➞ Page 85
➲ Changing audio language during play-
back (Multi-audio) ➞ Page 85
• Letter Box — The picture is in the shape of
a letter box with black bands at the top and
bottom of the screen
• Panscan — The picture is cut short at the
right and left of the screen
❒ When playing discs that do not specify
Panscan, playback is with Letter Box
even if you select the Panscan setting.
❒ Even if you use “S.Title” or “Audio” to
switch the subtitle or audio language, this
does not affect the settings here.
Confirm whether the disc package bears
16 : 9 LB
the
mark. (See “What the Marks
on DVDs Indicate” on page 18.)
❒ Some discs do not enable changing of the
TV aspect. For details, refer to the disc’s
instructions.
Setting assist subtitles on or off
Assist subtitles offer explanations for the aurally
impaired. However, they are only displayed if they
are recorded on the DVD.
Setting the parental lock
You can turn assist subtitles on or off as desired.
Some DVD-Video discs let you use parental lock
to restrict the viewing of violent and adult ori-
ented scenes by children. You can set the paren-
tal lock level in steps as desired.
1 Touch “Assist Subtitle”.
Touching “Assist Subtitle” switches
between “On” and “Off”.
❒ When you set a parental lock level and then
play a disc featuring parental lock, code
number input indications may be displayed. In
this case, playback will begin when the cor-
rect code number is input.
Setting angle icon display
You can set to display the angle icon on scenes
where the angle can be switched.
1 Touch “Multi Angle”.
Touching “Multi Angle” switches between
“On” and “Off”.
Setting the code number and level
When you first use this function, register your
code number. If you do not register a code num-
ber, parental lock will not operate.
Setting the aspect ratio
1 Touch “Parental”.
2 Touch “Parental”.
There are two kinds of display. A wide screen dis-
play has a width-to-height ratio (TV aspect) of
16:9, while a regular display has a TV aspect of
4:3. Be sure to select the correct TV aspect for the
display connected to REAR OUT (VIDEO
OUT).
3 Touch 0 — 9 to input a four digit code
number.
4 While the input number is displayed,
touch “Enter”.
❒ When using a regular display, select either
Letter Box or Panscan. Selecting 16:9 may
result in an unnatural picture.
The code number is registered, and you can
now set the level.
❒ If you select the TV aspect, navigation sys-
5 Touch any of 1 — 8 to select the desired
level.
tem’s display changes to the same setting.
1 Touch “TV Aspect”.
The parental lock level is set.
• Level 8 — Playback of the entire disc is
possible (initial setting)
Each touch of the TV Aspect changes the
settings as follows:
• Level 7 — Level 2 — Playback of discs for
children and non-adult oriented discs is
possible
• 16:9 — Wide screen picture (16:9) is dis-
played as it is (initial setting)
127
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Level 1 — Playback of discs for children
only is possible
❒ If you want to change the parental level,
❒ When the automatic playback is on, you
cannot operate repeating play of DVD disc.
➲ Refer to repeating play of DVD disc ➞
Page 83
enter the registered code number in the
Step 2.
❒ We recommend to keep a record of your
code number in case you forget it.
❒ The parental lock level is recorded on the
disc. You can confirm it by looking at the
disc package, included literature or on the
disc itself. With discs that do not feature a
recorded parental lock level, you cannot
use parental lock.
❒ With some discs, parental lock operates to
skip certain scenes only, after which nor-
mal playback resumes. For details, refer to
the disc’s instructions.
Setting the Subtitle File
You can select whether to display DivX external
subtitles or not.
❒ The DivX subtitles will be displayed even when
“On” is selected if no DivX external subtitle
files exist.
➲ “DivX subtitle files” ➞ Page 161
1 Touch “Subtitle File”.
Touching “Subtitle File” switches between
“On” and “Off”.
❒ If you forget the registered code number,
touch “Clear” 10 times on the screen in
the Step 2. The registered code number is
canceled, letting you register a new one.
❒ Up to 42 characters can be displayed on
one line. If more than 42 characters are
set, the line breaks and the characters are
displayed on the next line.
❒ Up to 126 characters can be displayed on
one screen. If more than 126 characters
are set, the excess characters will not be
displayed.
❒ The DivX subtitles will be displayed even
when the subtitle file setting is on if no cor-
responding subtitle files exist.
Displaying your DivX® VOD reg-
istration code
In order to play DivX VOD (video on demand) con-
tent on this navigation system, you first need to
register the unit with your DivX VOD content pro-
vider. You do this by generating a DivX VOD regis-
tration code, which you submit to your provider.
❒ Up to three lines can be displayed at once.
Initial Settings
1 Touch “DivX VOD”.
Your 8-digit registration code is displayed.
❒ Make a note of the code as you will need it
when you register with a DivX VOD pro-
vider.
Adjusting initial settings
Setting the Auto Play
When a DVD disc with DVD menu is inserted,
this unit will cancel the DVD menu automatically
and start playback from the first chapter of the
first title.
(1)
❒ This function is available for DVD-Video.
Initial settings lets you perform initial set up of
different settings for navigation system.
❒ Some DVDs may not operate properly. If this
function is not fully operated, turn this func-
tion off and start playback.
(1) Function display
1 Touch “OFF” in the AV Source screen to
turn source off.
1 Touch “Auto Play”.
Touching “Auto Play” switches between
“On” and “Off”.
➲ “Basic AV Source” ➞ Page 32
128
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
2 Press the MENU button to change to the
AV MENU.
❒ If you change the subwoofer controller
(Rear SP), the subwoofer output (Sub
Woofer) and non fading output (Non Fad-
ing) in the Sound menu return to the fac-
tory settings.
3 Touch “Initial”.
Setting the rear output and sub-
woofer controller
❒ Both rear speaker leads output and RCA
rear output are switched simultaneously in
this setting.
The navigation system’s rear output (rear speaker
leads output and RCA rear output) can be used
for full-range speaker (Rear SP Full) or sub-
woofer (Rear SP Sub. W) connection. If you
switch the rear output setting to the Rear SP
Sub. W, you can connect a rear speaker lead
directly to a subwoofer without using an auxiliary
amp.
Editing the PIN code
You can edit the PIN code you like. Use this func-
tion when you need to change the PIN code from
the default setting.
1 Touch “PIN Edit” in the Initial menu.
Initially, the navigation system is set for rear full-
range speaker connection (Rear SP Full). When
rear output is connected to full range speakers
(when Rear SP Full is selected), you can con-
nect the RCA subwoofer output to a subwoofer.
In this case, you can select whether to use the
subwoofer controller’s (low pass filter, phase)
built-in Preout Sub. W or the auxiliary Preout
Full.
2 Touch number key to enter the new PIN
code.
Bluetooth Device (BD) address
PIN code
❒ When 5.1ch setting is “On”, the rear output
and subwoofer setting is not available.
Version of the Bluetooth module
System (microprocessor) version
1 Touch “Rear SP” in the Initial menu.
3 Touch “Enter” to fix the new PIN code.
2 Touch “Rear SP” to switch the rear out-
put setting.
❒ The default setting of the PIN code is 0000.
When no subwoofer is connected to the rear
output, select Full.
output, select Sub. W.
Sound from this system is muted, attenuated or
mixed automatically in the following cases:
• When a call is made or received using a cellu-
lar phone connected to navigation system.
• When the voice guidance is output.
❒ When the rear output setting is Sub. W,
you cannot change the subwoofer control-
ler.
3 Touch “Preout” to switch the subwoofer
output or non fading output.
❒ The sound muting/attenuation function does
not work when you use a cellular phone con-
nected to the navigation system via the Blue-
tooth adapter, which is sold separately.
❒ Even if you change this setting, there is no
output unless you turn “Non Fading” or
“Sub Woofer” in the Sound menu “On”.
➲ “Using non fading output” ➞ Page 125
➲ “Using subwoofer output” ➞ Page 125
❒ When 5.1ch setting is “On”, the sound mut-
ing/attenuation setting is not available.
129
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
1 Touch “Mute Input/Guide” in the Initial
menu.
Other Functions
Each touch of the “Mute Input/Guide”
changes the settings as follows:
• Mute— Muting
Selecting the video for “Rear
display”
You can choose either to show the same image
as the front screen or to show the selected
source on the “Rear display”.
• ATT — Attenuation
• Normal — Volume does not change
❒ Operation returns to normal when the
phone connection (the mute signal on the
yellow/black lead) is ended or when the
navigation guidance is ended.
1 Press the AV button to switch AV opera-
tion screen.
❒ Even when you receive a phone call, navi-
gation voice guidance cannot be attenu-
ated or muted. Use Volume to control the
navigation voice guidance volume.
2 Press the MENU button and then touch
“REAR SCREEN”.
Switching the 5.1CH setting
When the navigation system is combined with
the multi-channel processor system (sold sepa-
rately), you can use the multi-channel sound.
Enter the following setting when combining the
multi-channel processor system.
Each touch of “REAR SCREEN” changes the
settings as follows:
• Mirror — The video on the front screen of
the navigation unit is output to the “Rear
display”
• DVD — The video and sound of the DVDs
are output to the “Rear display”
• AV1 — The video and sound of the AV-1
are output to the “Rear display”
• AV2 — The video and sound of the AV-2
are output to the “Rear display”
• DO NOT enter this setting before you con-
nect the multi-channel processor system.
(If this setting is entered, the RCA (“SUB-
WOOFER OUTPUT or NON-FADING OUT-
PUT”) will output maximum volume for
the multi-channel processor system.) Pio-
neer is not responsible for any damage to
the speaker equipment caused by ignoring
this warning.
❒ When Mirror is selected, the following
restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.
— When selecting “Rear View” in the map
display, nothing is displayed.
— All sounds cannot be output for “Rear dis-
play”.
❒ This setting is possible only when the optical
cable connection box (supplied with the Mul-
tichannel processor) is connected to the navi-
gation system.
— The map screen navigation images output
to the “Rear display” differ from standard
NTSC format images. Therefore, their quality
will be inferior to the images that appear on
the front screen.
❒ When DVD is selected, the following
restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.
— When a CD or MP3/WMA/AAC disc is set
in the built-in DVD drive, nothing is output.
❒ When AV1/AV2 is selected, the following
restrictions are applied to “Rear display”.
— The “Video image” and sound are output
only when the AV-1/AV-2 has both video and
sound.
1 Touch “5.1CH” in the Initial menu.
If you touch “5.1CH”, it will be turned “On”. If
you touch “5.1CH” again to turn “Off”.
130
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
— The “Video image” and sound are output
only when the appropriate setting on “AV1
Input” / “AV2 Input”.
❒ Use AV2 Input when connecting CD-
RM10 (sold separately) through the exter-
nal video component.
Setup adjustments
Setting for rear view camera
The following two functions are available. The
rear view camera feature requires a separately
sold rear view camera (e.g. ND-BC2). (For details,
consult your dealer.)
Camera for backing up
The navigation system features a function that
automatically switches to the full-screen rear
camera image installed on your vehicle. When
the shift lever is in the REVERSE (R) position, the
screen automatically switches to full-screen rear
view camera.
(1)
(1) System menu display
➲ How to display the System menu ➞ Page 79
Camera for Rear view mode
Setting the video input
You can switch the setting according to the con-
nected component.
Rear View can be displayed at all times (e.g.
when monitoring an attached trailer, etc.) as a
split screen where map information is partially
displayed. Please be aware that in this setting,
camera image is not resized to fit, and that a por-
tion of what is seen by the camera is not view-
able.
❒ Select “Video” to watch video of a connected
component as AV-1 or AV-2 source.
1 Touch “AV1 Input” or “AV2 Input” in the
System menu.
Each touch of the “AV1 Input” or “AV2
Input” changes the settings as follows:
AV1 Input:
• Off — No video component is connected
• Video — External video component
• EXT — Pioneer external unit connected
with RCA video cable
• M-DVD — DVD player or Multi-DVD player
connected with IP-BUS cable.
❒ When a DVD player or Multi-DVD player is
• Pioneer recommends the use of a camera
which outputs mirror reversed images,
otherwise screen image may appear
reversed.
• Immediately confirm whether the display
changes to a rear view camera image when the
shift lever is moved to REVERSE (R) from
another position.
• When the whole screen changes to a rear view
camera image during normal driving, switch to
another setting.
connected with IP-BUS cable and RCA
video cable, select M-DVD. When the AV
source is M-DVD, the “Video image” of the
DVD player or Multi-DVD player can be dis-
played.
❒ Initially, this function is set to Off.
AV2 Input:
1 Touch “Camera” in the System menu.
• Off — No video component is connected
• Video — External video component
❒ When a Pioneer external unit is connected
with an IP-BUS cable, select EXT. When
the audio source is EXT, the “Video
image” of the Pioneer external unit can be
displayed.
2 Touch “Camera” to turn rear view camera
setting on.
Touching “Camera” switches between “On”
and “Off”.
❒ Unless this setting is “On”, you cannot
switch to Rear View mode.
131
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Touch “Polarity” to select an appropriate
setting for polarity.
Changing the Wide Screen Mode
Each time you touch “Polarity” switches
between the following polarity:
• Battery — When the polarity of the con-
nected lead is positive while the shift lever
is in the REVERSE (R) position
• GND — When the polarity of the connected
lead is negative while the shift lever is in the
REVERSE (R) position
• For safety reasons, you cannot use some of
these navigation functions while your
vehicle is in motion. To enable these func-
tions, you must stop in a safe place and
apply the parking brake (see page 13 for
details).
Switching the auto antenna set-
ting
If the blue lead of the navigation system is con-
nected to the auto antenna of the vehicle, select
either of the following settings.
• Radio — Extends the antenna only for the
Radio source. The antenna is stored when the
source is switched to another source.
• Power — Extends the antenna when the igni-
tion switch is turned on. The antenna is stored
when the ignition switch is turned off.
1 Touch “Wide Mode” in the System menu
to select the desired setting.
Touch “Wide Mode” repeatedly to switch
between the following settings:
Full (full) — Just (just) — Cinema (cinema)
— Zoom (zoom) — Normal (normal)
Full (full)
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the horizontal direc-
tion only, enabling you to enjoy a 4:3 TV picture
(normal picture) without any omissions.
1 Touch “Antenna Control” in the System
menu.
Just (just)
The picture is enlarged slightly at the center and
Touching “Antenna Control” switches
between “Radio” and “Power”.
❒ Regardless of whether “Radio” or
“Power” is selected, turning off the igni-
tion switch will cause the antenna to auto-
matically retract.
the amount of enlargement increases horizon-
tally toward the ends of the picture, enabling you
to enjoy a 4:3 picture without sensing any dispar-
ity even on a wide screen.
Cinema (cinema)
A picture is enlarged by the same proportion as
Just in the horizontal direction and by an inter-
mediate proportion between Full and Zoom in
the vertical direction; ideal for a cinema-sized pic-
ture (wide screen picture) where captions lie out-
side the frame.
Setting the illumination color
The illumination color can be selected Blue or
Red.
1 Touch “Illumi Color” in the System menu.
2 Touch desired color.
Zoom (zoom)
A 4:3 picture is enlarged in the same proportion
both vertically and horizontally; ideal for a cin-
ema-sized picture (wide screen picture).
Setting the screen color
You can select one of five colors as the screen
color.
Normal (normal)
A 4:3 picture is displayed as it is, giving you no
sense of disparity since its proportions are the
same as that of the normal picture.
1 Touch “Screen Color” in the System
menu.
❒ Different settings can be memorized for each
2 Touch desired color.
video source.
• White/Blue/Yellow/Red/Green
132
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ When video is viewed in a wide screen mode
that does not match its original aspect ratio, it
may appear differently.
❒ The adjustments of Brightness, Contrast
and Dimmer are stored separately when
your vehicle’s headlights are off (daytime)
and when your vehicle’s headlight are on
(nighttime). These are switched automati-
cally depending on the vehicle’s head-
lights are on or off.
❒ You cannot adjust Color and Hue for the
source without a video and navigation map
display.
❒ Remember that use of this system for com-
mercial or public viewing purposes may con-
stitute an infringement on the author’s rights
protected by the Copyright Law.
❒ Video will appear grainy when viewed in Cin-
ema or Zoom mode.
❒ The navigation map and the rear view camera
❒ If you select “Source”, sources without
video and sources with video are saved
separately in the memory.
picture is always Full.
❒ The picture adjustment may not be able to
be used with some rear view cameras.
❒ The same setting is selected for the normal
background picture and the navigation
map display.
Operating the Picture Adjust-
ment
• For safety reasons, you cannot use some of
these navigation functions while your
vehicle is in motion. To enable these func-
tions, you must stop in a safe place and
apply the parking brake (see page 13 for
details).
❒ Because of the LCD screen characteris-
tics, you may not be able to adjust the
screen at low temperatures.
3 Touch “+” or “–” to adjust the selected
item.
Each time you touch “+” or “–” increases or
decreases the level of selected item. +24 to
–24 is displayed as the level is increased or
decreased.
❒ Dimmer can be adjusted in the range of
+1 to +48.
1 Touch “V.Adjust” in the System menu.
2 Select the desired item you want to
adjust.
• Camera — Switch to the picture adjust-
ment display for the rear view camera
• Source — Switch to the picture adjust-
ment display for the AV source screen
• Map — Switch to the picture adjustment
display for the map screen
4 Touch “ESC” to return to the previous
screen.
Switching the backlight On/Off
By turning off the backlight of the LCD screen,
you can turn off the screen display without turn-
ing off the voice guidance.
❒ When the display is already on the screen,
a message to that effect appears.
1 Touch “Screen Off” in the System menu.
The backlight turns off, and the screen turns
off.
❒ To turn on the backlight, touch the screen
again or press the MAP button.
Brightness — Adjust the black intensity
Contrast — Adjust the contrast
Color — Adjust the color saturation
Hue — Adjust the tone of color (red is empha-
sized or green is emphasized)
Dimmer — Adjust the brightness of display
133
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Language Code Chart for DVD
Language (code), input code
Japanese (ja), 1001
English (en), 0514
French (fr), 0618
Spanish (es), 0519
German (de), 0405
Italian (it), 0920
Language (code), input code
Language (code), input code
Pashto, Pushto (ps), 1619
Quechua (qu), 1721
Rhaeto-Romance (rm), 1813
Kirundi (rn), 1814
Rumanian (ro), 1815
Kinyarwanda (rw), 1823
Sanskrit (sa), 1901
Sindhi (sd), 1904
Guarani (gn), 0714
Gujarati (gu), 0721
Hausa (ha), 0801
Hindi (hi), 0809
Croatian (hr), 0818
Hungarian (hu), 0821
Armenian (hy), 0825
Interlingua (ia), 0901
Interlingue (ie), 0905
Inupiak (ik), 0911
Indonesian (in), 0914
Icelandic (is), 0919
Hebrew (iw), 0923
Yiddish (ji), 1009
Javanese (jw), 1023
Georgian (ka), 1101
Kazakh (kk), 1111
Greenlandic (kl), 1112
Cambodian (km), 1113
Kannada (kn), 1114
Kashmiri (ks), 1119
Kurdish (ku), 1121
Kirghiz (ky), 1125
Chinese (zh), 2608
Dutch (nl), 1412
Portuguese (pt), 1620
Swedish (sv), 1922
Russian (ru), 1821
Korean (ko), 1115
Greek (el), 0512
Sango (sg), 1907
Serbo-Croatian (sh), 1908
Shinghalese (si), 1909
Slovak (sk), 1911
Slovenian (sl), 1912
Samoan (sm), 1913
Shona (sn), 1914
Somali (so), 1915
Albanian (sq), 1917
Serbian (sr), 1918
Siswati (ss), 1919
Sesotho (st), 1920
Sundanese (su), 1921
Swahili (sw), 1923
Tamil (ta), 2001
Afar (aa), 0101
Abkhazian (ab), 0102
Afrikaans (af), 0106
Amharic (am), 0113
Arabic (ar), 0118
Assamese (as), 0119
Aymara (ay), 0125
Azerbaijani (az), 0126
Bashkir (ba), 0201
Belorussian (be), 0205
Bulgarian (bg), 0207
Bihari (bh), 0208
Latin (la), 1201
Lingala (ln), 1214
Telugu (te), 2005
Tajik (tg), 2007
Bislama (bi), 0209
Bengali, Bangla (bn), 0214
Tibetan (bo), 0215
Breton (br), 0218
Catalan (ca), 0301
Corsican (co), 0315
Czach (cs), 0319
Laotian (lo), 1215
Thai (th), 2008
Lithusnian (lt), 1220
Latvian, Lettish (lv), 1222
Malagasy (mg), 1307
Maori (mi), 1309
Macedonian (mk), 1311
Malayalam (ml), 1312
Mongolian (mn), 1314
Moldavian (mo), 1315
Marathi (mr), 1318
Malay (ms), 1319
Tigrinya (ti), 2009
Turkmen (tk), 2011
Tagalog (tl), 2012
Setswana (tn), 2014
Tongan (to), 2015
Turkish (tr), 2018
Tsonga (ts), 2019
Tatar (tt), 2020
Twi (tw), 2023
Ukrainian (uk), 2111
Urdu (ur), 2118
Uzbek (uz), 2126
Vietnamese (vi), 2209
Volapük (vo), 2215
Wolof (wo), 2315
Welsh (cy), 0325
Danish (da), 0401
Bhutani (dz), 0426
Esperanto (eo), 0515
Estonian (et), 0520
Basque (eu), 0521
Persian (fa), 0601
Finnish (fi), 0609
Fiji (fj), 0610
Faroese (fo), 0615
Frisian (fy), 0625
Maltese (mt), 1320
Burmese (my), 1325
Nauru (na), 1401
Nepali (ne), 1405
Norwegian (no), 1415
Occitan (oc), 1503
Oromo (om), 1513
Oriya (or), 1518
Xhosa (xh), 2408
Yoruba (yo), 2515
Zulu (zu), 2621
Irish (ga), 0701
Scottish Gaelic (gd), 0704
Galician (gl), 0712
Panjabi (pa), 1601
Polish (pl), 1612
134
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Appendix
9 Touch “OK”.
Anti-theft function
10Reenter the password in step 7 to confirm
the setting.
You can set a password for the navigation sys-
tem. If the back-up lead is cut or RESET button
is pressed after the password is set, the naviga-
tion system prompts for the password next boot-
up.
11Touch “OK”.
The password is set.
If the incorrect password is entered, the naviga-
tion and AV functions cannot be performed.
Enter the password
In password input screen, you must enter the
current password. If you enter the incorrect pass-
word three times, the navigation system is
locked.
Setting the password
Set both the password and a hint phrase at the
same time. Set a password based on the hint
phrase. The hint phrase will remind you of the
password in case you forget it.
1 Enter the password.
2 Touch “OK”.
1 With the map displayed, press the MENU
button.
The password mode is canceled.
Delete the password
The current password can be deleted.
2 Touch “Settings” in the NAVI MENU.
3 Touch “System Options”.
1 With the map displayed, press the MENU
button.
4 Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and then
touch and hold Area3.
2 Touch “Settings” in the NAVI MENU.
3 Touch “System Options”.
Area1
Area2
Area3
4 Touch Area1, followed by Area2, and then
touch and hold Area3.
The password setting screen appears.
The password setting screen appears.
5 Touch “Clear password”.
6 Enter the current password.
7 Touch “OK”.
5 Touch “Set password”.
6 Select a hint phrase.
❒ Touching or switches to the next or
previous page in the list.
8 Touch “Yes”.
The current password is deleted.
7 Touch “OK”.
If the password is forgotten
Contact the nearest authorized Pioneer Service
Station.
8 Enter the password you want to set.
❒ Five to sixteen characters can be entered
for a password.
135
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
3 Touch “Yes/Oui”.
Installing the Program
When you start the navigation system for the
first time, you will see a confirmation message
asking if you wish to select another language.
English is the default language of the naviga-
tion system. If desired, you can select another
language as shown.
❒ To keep English, touch “No/Non”. After
this, proceed to Step 7.
❒ When you want to select another lan-
guage, touch “Yes/Oui”, and proceed to
the next step.
The program is installed to the navigation system
using the application disc.
This is not necessary if your dealer already
performed the installation.
When installing the program, you carry out the
following operations. When all the setup proce-
dures are completed, you can use the navigation
system.
1 Insert the disc while the vehicle is
parked.
4 Select the language from the list.
Touch the language you want to use.
2 Select the language used for the navi-
gation system.
3 Set the time difference.
1 Park your vehicle in a safe place.
Leave the engine on, and make sure that the
parking brake is applied.
❒ The language selected here is reflected for
the navigation functions (e.g., Destination
search, etc.) only.
➲ To change the language ➞ Page 74
Installation of the program begins in the lan-
guage that you chose.
2 Insert the Pioneer DVD Map Disc into the
disc loading slot of the navigation sys-
tem.
When the upgraded program has been found,
installation of the program starts immediately.
❒ Do not insert anything other than a disc
into the disc loading slot.
❒ If you cannot insert a disc completely or if
an inserted disc is not recognized, check
that the label side of the disc is up. Press
the EJECT button to eject the disc, and
check the disc for damage before inserting
the disc again.
When the installation is complete, the open-
ing display appears.
• Once the installation of the program starts,
do not stop the engine of your vehicle nor
switch off the navigation system until the
installation is completed and the following
Map screen with current position appears.
Some time is needed until navigation is ready.
136
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Check the details of the caution message
and touch “OK”.
Adjusting the Response Posi-
tions of the Touch Panels
(Touch Panel Calibration)
6 To set the time difference, touch “+” or
“–”.
If you feel that the touch keys on the screen devi-
ate from the actual positions that respond to your
touch, adjust the response positions of the touch
panel. There are two adjustment methods: 4-point
adjustment, in which you touch four corners of
the screen, and 16-point adjustment, in which
you make fine-adjustments on the entire screen.
❒ Make sure to use the supplied stylus for
adjustment and gently touch the screen. If
you press the touch panel forcefully, the touch
panel may be damaged. Do not use a sharp
pointed tool such as a ballpoint pen or a
mechanical pen. Otherwise the screen is
damaged.
Time difference
The time difference between the time origi-
nally set in the navigation system (Pacific
Standard Time) and the current location of
your vehicle is shown. If necessary, adjust the
time difference. Touching “+” or “–” changes
the time difference display in one-hour incre-
ments. The time difference can be set from
+3 to –3 hours.
Stylus (supplied with navigation system)
7 If necessary, set to summer time.
Daylight Saving Time (DST) is off by default.
Touch “Off” to change the time if you are in
the daylight saving period. This turns the dis-
play below summer time “On”.
1 Press the VOLUME knob (or AV button) to
switch to the AV operation screen.
2 Press the MENU button to change to the
AV Source screen.
3 Press and hold the MENU button for two
seconds or more.
The 4-point touch panel adjustment screen
appears.
8 To complete the setting, touch “Back”.
4 Touch and hold the arrows that point to
the corners of the LCD screen with the
stylus.
The red arrow indicates the order.
The map of your surroundings appears.
This completes the setup of your navigation sys-
tem. Chapter 1 explains the basic operation of
your navigation system.
➲ To change the time later ➞ Page 76
137
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
5 Press the MENU button.
The adjusted position data is saved.
❒ Do not turn off the engine while saving the
adjusted position data.
Memory Navi Mode
While the DVD Map Disc is inserted, you can
store the data on the DVD Map Disc into the
memory of the navigation system. If the DVD Map
Disc is removed from the navigation system after
the data is stored, navigation is performed using
the data in the memory (memory navi mode). In
the memory navi mode, you can play a music CD
or DVD-Video on the navigation system while nav-
igation is taking place.
❒ Press the MENU button to complete the 4-
point adjustment.
❒ To cancel the adjustment, press and hold
the MENU button.
6 Press the MENU button.
The 16-point touch panel adjustment screen
appears.
The operation is automatically switched to the
memory navi mode when the DVD Map Disc is
removed from the navigation system.
7 Gently touch the center of the + mark dis-
played on the screen with the touch panel
adjustment pen.
Navigation in the memory navi
mode
After you touch all marks, the adjusted posi-
tion data is saved.
❒ Do not turn off the engine while saving the
adjusted position data.
❒ Press the MENU button to return to the
previous adjustment position.
During the memory navi mode, navigation is per-
formed only using the data read into the memory.
Therefore, some functions are restricted com-
pared with navigation using the DVD Map Disc
(DVD navi mode). These function buttons, which
cannot be used in the memory navi mode, are
indicated in light gray. (If you want to use these
functions, please insert the DVD Map Disc
again.) In addition, you may need to insert the
DVD Map Disc and store new data in the memory
during navigation operation, such as when the
destination is far away.
8 Press and hold the MENU button.
The adjustment is complete.
❒ If touch panel adjustment cannot be per-
formed properly, consult your local Pio-
neer dealer.
The memory navi mode uses the following map
data to perform navigation.
The following are collectively known as Memory
Data:
• Manually downloaded memory area data in
“Map in Memory” of the Settings menu (Man-
ual downloaded Memory Area)
• Automatically downloaded memory data of the
surrounding areas during the route search
(Auto downloaded Memory Area)
➲ Setting of the memory area ➞ Page 76
What is the manual downloaded mem-
ory area?
Memory area is the area of the map data that the
user voluntarily read into the memory for the
memory navi mode. Normal guidance is available
if the memory area is stored and you drive within
the stored area.
138
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
What is the auto downloaded memory
area?
NAVI MENU
Route Options menu
Edit Current Route
View Current Route
Recalculate
Number of Routes
Route Condition
Avoid Freeway
This is the zone around the route in the map area
that is automatically stored in the memory when
the route is set. When the route distance is
74.5 miles (120 km) or shorter, a zone with a
width of approximately 10.9 miles (17.5 km)
around the route is stored.
When the route distance is longer than 74.5 miles
(120 km), a zone with a width of approximately
6.6 miles (10.6 km) around the route is recorded.
This data is transmitted to the memory as you set
the route. When a new route is entered, the mem-
orized data is deleted.
–
U
–
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Avoid Ferry
Avoid Toll Road
Designate Areas to Avoid
Settings menu
–
✓
U
✓
✓
Volume
System Options
Short-Cut Selection
Map Display Options
Defined Locations
Demo Mode
The memorized area may be deleted in the follow-
ing circumstances:
• Yellow lead of the navigation system or the
vehicle battery is disconnected.
–
–
• The RESET button is pressed.
• Navigation software is updated.
• System language is changed.
✓
Time
✓
Modify Current Location
Hardware Info
Restore Factory Settings
U*
✓
Navigation operation during the mem-
ory navi mode
✓ :Operation possible
Shortcut menu
U :Operation restricted
– :Operation not possible
: Destination
: Change Route
: Registration
–
U
✓
NAVI MENU
: Vicinity Search
: Volume Setting
: Whole Route Overview
: Overlay POI
: Address Book
: Route Options
: Edit Current Route
: Traffic On Route
: Stock Info
–
–
Destination menu
Address Search
Return Home
Go to
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
–
✓
✓
–
–
POI Search
U
Vicinity Search
Address Book
Destination History
Freeway Search
Telephone Search
Cancel Route
Info/Traffic menu
Traffic On Route
Traffic Events
Traffic Flow
Traffic Settings
XM Status
Stock Info
Set My Favorites
My Favorites
Emergency Info
Overlay POI
–
–
✓
✓
✓
: Set My Favorites
: My Favorites
*: Product Number in the Service Info Screen is not
displayed.
–
–
–
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
About the icon for the memory
navi mode
When new route guidance starts, the route data
from the DVD Map Disc is read into the memory
of the navigation system. The status of the mem-
ory navi mode is indicated by the following icons
on the lower right of the map screen.
(Green flashes): Reading the data
–
139
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
(Green is lit): Operated in memory navi mode
(Red flashes): Operated in memory navi
mode, but the remaining distance for guidance is
less than 12.5 miles.
navi mode when the DVD Map Disc is set
again.
• In memory navi mode, map scale data that
cannot be read in the memory cannot be dis-
played. Accordingly, the edge of the map will
appear cut off along the point it was not read
into memory. This simply indicates the edge of
the map data, and is not a malfunction.
❒ Where the navigation guidance is impossible,
the icon is lit in red. In that case, reinsert the
DVD Map Disc.
When
disappears, memory navi mode is
ready. You can now remove the DVD Map Disc.
❒ If you want to remove the DVD Map Disc while
preparing for the memory navi mode, press
the EJECT button more than 2 seconds.
When the DVD Map Disc is removed, data
cannot be read any more and preparation for
memory navi mode will be canceled accord-
ingly. (Since the reading of the map data used
in the memory navi mode is not complete, the
map scale may switch to a larger scale. In this
case, route guidance will continue up to the
location already memorized.)
• If you keep driving or scrolling the map to a
point where the map can no longer be dis-
played, the scale automatically switches to a
range possible to display. If you would like to
continue driving or scrolling the map at the
same scale, set the DVD Map Disc in the navi-
gation system.
• You cannot reroute to avoid traffic congestion
or closure.
• If you continue to drive outside the route for a
while, you may not be able to perform map
matching.
• If you deviate from the route during memory
navi mode, set route will be rerouted, but only
to return you to the original route calculated
within the memorized area.
• Although an enlarged map of the intersection
will be displayed, no special freeway illustra-
tion (illustration of freeway intersections) will
be displayed.
In memory navi mode, you will be notified in three
cases: when the distance to the edge of the mem-
orized area is 12 miles (20 km), 6 miles (10 km)
and 3 miles (5 km) respectively.
Preparation for memory navi mode will have to be
repeated if the vehicle enters an unrecorded area,
then returns to an area stored in the disc. (Prepa-
ration for the memory navi mode starts from the
location where the vehicle re-entered the area
stored on the disc.)
Major restrictions during the
memory navi mode
• If the XM tuner (GEX-P10XMT, GEX-P920XM),
which is sold separately, is connected, the logo
data is not displayed during memory navi
mode.
• If a route was set to your destination in mem-
ory navi mode, inserting the DVD Map Disc
automatically starts recalculation of another
route. (You cannot cancel this reroute opera-
tion. If the route calculation fails for some rea-
son, a message will appear asking you to either
recalculate a route (Reroute) or delete the cur-
rent route (Delete route). In this case, drive for
a while before touching either “Reroute” or
“Delete route” to delete the current route, then
reset the destination.)
• In some cases, you may not be able to use map
display mode during DVD navi mode. If the
map display mode is not changed during
memory navi mode, the display will return to
the map display mode used during the DVD
Cautions relating to auto reroute
in memory navi mode
Auto rerouting in memory navi mode is designed
to return you to your original route wherever pos-
sible.
In memory navi mode, persistently deviating from
the route may result in one of the following:
• A clearly circuitous route
• Leaving a toll road and returning to the toll
road from where you left it.
In the above case, if the set route seems unsuit-
able, insert the DVD Map Disc that records your
140
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
current position. Setting the DVD Map Disc to
navigation automatically resets the route from
your current location to your destination.
The accuracy of the GPS information depends on
how good the reception is. When the signals are
strong and reception is good, GPS can determine
latitude, longitude and altitude for accurate posi-
tioning in three dimensions. But if signal quality
is poor, only two dimensions, latitude and longi-
tude, can be obtained and positioning errors are
somewhat greater.
TRAFFIC icon during the
memory navi mode
• XM NavTraffic-related data for a “Zone” (e.g.,
Zone 1 contain ID, OR, WA) only can be memo-
rized. Therefore, if
appears on the
screen when crossing a zone border, you will
need to insert the disc to use the XM NavTraffic
function. Touching
allows you to
check the locations of the traffic information
along the route. However, you cannot perform
rerouting.
Operation outside the memo-
rized area
When the vehicle leaves the memorized area, the
functions will be limited.
• The auto reroute function does not work.
• You can only display a larger scale map. The
map display will automatically change to a
25 mi (or 50 mi) scale.
• The map matching function will not be avail-
able. Therefore, the position of your vehicle
may be misaligned.
• The navigation guidance will only be available
when arriving at your destination. Other guid-
ance is not possible (this includes no display of
direction arrows).
To cancel these limitations, insert the DVD Map
Disc to the navigation system.
Positioning by dead reckoning
The 3D Hybrid Sensor in the navigation system
also calculates your position. The current loca-
tion is measured by detecting driving distance
with the speed pulse, the turning direction with
the Gyrosensor and inclination of the road with
the G sensor.
The 3D Hybrid Sensor can even calculate
changes of altitude, and corrects for discrepan-
cies in the distance traveled caused by driving
along winding roads or up slopes. Also, the navi-
gation system learns the driving conditions and
stores information in the memory. Thus, as you
drive more, the precision of the positioning
becomes more accurate.
Positioning Technology
The method of positioning changes as follows
depending on whether the speed pulse of your
vehicle is detected or not:
The navigation system accurately measures your
current location by combining the positioning by
GPS and by Dead Reckoning.
3D hybrid mode
This is active when the speed pulse is detected.
Positioning by GPS
Inclination of a street can be detected.
The Global Positioning System (GPS) uses a net-
work of satellites orbiting the Earth. Each of the
satellites, which orbit at a height of 68 900 000
feet (21 000 km), continually broadcasts radio sig-
nals giving time and position information. This
ensures that signals from at least three can be
picked up from any open area on the ground’s
surface.
Simple hybrid mode
When the speed pulse is not detected, position-
ing is performed in this mode. Only horizontal
movement is detected, so it becomes less accu-
rate. Also, when the positioning by GPS is not
available, such as when your vehicle enters a
long tunnel, the discrepancy between your actual
and calculated position may become bigger.
141
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ The speed pulse data comes from the speed
sensing circuit. The location of this speed
sensing circuit depends on your vehicle
model. In some cases, it is impossible to
make a connection to it, and in such a case
we recommend that the ND-PG1 speed pulse
generator (sold separately) be used.
Map matching
As mentioned, the GPS and dead reckoning sys-
tems used by this navigation system are suscepti-
ble to certain errors. Their calculations may, on
occasion, place you in a location on the map
where no road exists. In this situation, the pro-
cessing system understands that vehicles travel
only on roads, and can correct your position by
adjusting it to a nearby road. This is called map
matching.
How do GPS and dead reckon-
ing work together?
For maximum accuracy, your navigation system
continually compares GPS data with your esti-
mated position as calculated from the data of 3D
Hybrid Sensor. However, if only the data from the
3D Hybrid Sensor is available for a long period,
positioning errors are gradually compounded
until the estimated position becomes unreliable.
For this reason, whenever GPS signals are avail-
able, they are matched with the data of the 3D
Hybrid Sensor and used to correct it for improved
accuracy.
With map matching
To ensure maximum accuracy, the dead reckon-
ing system learns with experience. By comparing
the position it estimates with your actual position
as obtained using GPS, it can correct for various
types of error, such as tire wear and the rolling
motion of your vehicle. As you drive, the dead
reckoning system gradually gathers more data,
learns more, and the accuracy of its estimates
gradually increases. So, after you have driven
some distance, you can expect your position as
shown on the map to show fewer errors.
Without map matching
❒ If you use chains on your wheels for winter
driving or put on the spare wheel, errors may
suddenly increase because of difference in
wheel diameter. The system detects the fact
that the tire diameter has changed, and auto-
matically replaces the value for calculating
distance.
❒ If the ND-PG1 is used or if your vehicle is oper-
ating in Simple hybrid mode, the distance cal-
culation value cannot be replaced
automatically.
142
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If a car phone or cellular phone is used near
the GPS antenna, GPS reception may be lost
temporarily.
• Do not cover the GPS antenna with spray paint
or car wax, because this may block the recep-
tion of GPS signals. Snow buildup can also
degrade the signals, so keep the antenna
clear.
Handling Large Errors
Positioning errors are kept to a minimum by com-
bining GPS, Dead Reckoning and map matching.
However, in some situations, these functions
may not work properly, and the error may become
bigger.
❒ If, for any reason, GPS signals cannot be
received, learning and error correction are not
possible. If GPS positioning has been operat-
ing for only a short time, your vehicle’s actual
position and the current location mark on the
map may diverge considerably. Once GPS
reception is restored, accuracy will be recov-
ered.
When the positioning by GPS is
impossible
• If signals cannot be received from more than
two GPS satellites, GPS positioning does not
take place.
• In some driving conditions, signals from GPS
satellites may not reach your vehicle. In this
case, it is impossible for the system to use GPS
positioning.
Vehicles that Cannot Obtain
Speed Pulse Data
❒ The speed pulse data comes from the speed
sensing circuit. The location of this speed
sensing circuit depends on your vehicle
model. In some cases, it is impossible to
make a connection to it, and in such a case
we recommend that the ND-PG1 speed pulse
generator (sold separately) be used.
In tunnels or enclosed parking garages
Conditions Likely to Cause
Noticeable Positioning Errors
For various reasons such as the state of the road
you are traveling on and the state of reception of
the GPS signal, the actual position of your vehicle
may differ from the position displayed on the map
screen.
Under elevated roads or similar structures
• If you make a shallow turn.
When driving among high buildings
When driving through a dense forest or tall trees
143
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If there is a parallel road.
• If there is a loop or similar road configuration.
• If you take a ferry.
• If there is another road very nearby, such as in
the case of an elevated freeway.
• If you are driving on a long, straight road or a
gently curving road.
• If you take a recently opened road that is not on
the map.
• If you are on a steep mountain road with many
height changes.
• If you drive in zig-zags.
• If you enter or exit a multi-storey parking lot or
similar structure using a spiral ramp.
• If the road has connected hairpin bends.
144
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If your vehicle is turned on a turntable or simi-
lar structure.
• If you join the road after driving around a large
parking lot.
• When you pass around a traffic circle.
• If your vehicle’s wheels spin, such as on a
gravel road or in snow.
• When starting driving immediately after start-
ing the engine.
• If you insert the disc and turn your navigation
system on while driving.
• If you put on chains, or change your tires for
ones with a different size.
Some types of vehicles may not output a speed
signal while driving at just a few kilometers per
hour. In such a case, the current location of your
vehicle may not be displayed correctly while in a
traffic congestion or in a parking lot.
• If trees or other obstacles block the GPS sig-
nals for a considerable period.
About the Data being Deleted
The information is erased by pushing the RESET
button or disconnect yellow lead from battery (or
remove the battery itself), except for the following
items.
• Sensor learning status and driving status
• Memory area memorized manually
• Area to avoid
• Registered Locations in “Address Book”
• Data registered in “Emergency Info”
• If you drive very slowly, or in a start-and-stop
manner, as in a traffic congestion.
145
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• If a route calculation is operated within an
areas not stored on the disc, the route might
not be set from the streets you are currently
driving. Also, if you set the destination in an
area not stored on the disc of the disc, the sys-
tem may not be able to set the route up to the
destination.
• If the vehicle deviates from the set route in an
area not stored on the disc, the Auto Reroute
function will not work.
• Even if “Close-up of Junction” is “On”, the
display will not switch to an enlarged map of
the junction.
• Even if you drive on the freeway, lane informa-
tion, freeway exit numbers and freeway signs
will not be displayed.
Limitation of Functions for
Areas not Stored on the Disc
For areas not stored on the disc, the functions
will operate as follows:
Displaying the map
• Maps with a scale of between 0.02 mile and
0.25 mile cannot be displayed. (If the scale was
set to between 0.02 mile and 0.25 mile, it is
automatically switched to 0.5 mile.)
• When driving with Guide View, Route View
or Driver’s View, upon entering an area not
stored on the disc the display automatically
switches to Map View. (When the vehicle
reenters an area stored on the disc, the display
returns to the previous map mode except for
Driver’s View.)
Route information
• If the set route goes through an area not stored
on the disc, no route profile for that area will be
displayed. (If the set route traverses both an
area not stored on the disc and area stored on
the disc, only the route profile within the area
stored on the disc will be displayed.)
Destination search
• You cannot search a destination in an area not
stored on the disc using Address Search or
Telephone Search.
• Route scrolling for an area not stored on the
disc is possible only with a map scale of 0.5 mi
or above.
• In case of POI Search and Vicinity Search,
only “City Center” search is possible.
• If you cannot search in a currently selected
zone, the system may forcibly switch to the
zone selection screen.
• A Freeway Search covers all areas, regard-
less of the disc on which the information is
stored.
• If a Vicinity Search is performed on the bor-
der of an area not stored on the disc, the sys-
tem will not necessarily select the nearest
facility. (The search will take place only within
the range of areas stored on the disc.)
Other function limitations
Overlay POI
• Only display “City Center” is available in an
area not stored on the disc.
Memory mode
• Only data for areas stored on the disc can be
memorized. (Data for areas not stored on the
disc cannot be memorized.)
• If the vehicle enters an area not stored on the
disc, preparation for memory navi mode will
have to be redone after the vehicle returns to
an area stored in the disc. (Preparation for the
memory navi mode starts from the location
where the vehicle re-entered the area stored on
the disc.)
Guidance
• When your vehicle approaches an area not
stored on the disc, you will be notified three
times: when the distance to the area not stored
on the disc is 12 miles (20 km), 6 miles (10 km)
and 3 miles (5 km) respectively. When your
vehicle enters that area, a caution is given.
• In the areas not stored on the disc, only guid-
ance for reaching the destination is provided.
No other guidance is given.
Avoid area
• An area not stored on the disc cannot be set as
an Areas to Avoid.
146
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
❒ A set Areas to Avoid may be deleted when
the software is updated. If this happens, the
system will automatically try to recover the
deleted information, but data can be recov-
ered only for areas stored on the disc. For
items that could not be recovered, a recovery
process will begin when you set another disc.
147
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Troubleshooting
If you have problems operating your navigation system, refer to this section. The most common prob-
lems are listed below, along with likely causes and solutions. While this list is not comprehensive, it
should answer your most common problems. If a solution to your problem cannot be found here, con-
tact your dealer or the nearest authorized Pioneer service facility.
Problems in the navigation screen
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
Power doesn’t turn on.
The unit doesn’t operate.
Leads and connectors are incorrectly Confirm once more that all connec-
connected.
tions are correct.
The fuse is blown.
Rectify the reason for the fuse blow-
ing, then replace the fuse. Be very
sure to install a correct fuse with the
same rate.
Noise and other factors are causing Press the RESET button. (➞ Refer to
the built-in microprocessor to oper-
ate incorrectly.
page 20 in this manual.)
The power turns on, but the unit does The 30-pin cable has been discon-
Press the RESET button while the
power is on.
not operate.
nected and then reconnected.
When the ignition switch is turned
ON (or turned to ACC), the motor
sounds.
The navigation system confirms
whether a disc is loaded or not.
This is a normal operation.
You cannot position your vehicle on
the map or the positioning error is
large.
The quality of signals from the GPS
satellites is poor, causing reduced
positioning accuracy. Such a loss of antenna if necessary, or continue
signal quality may happen for the fol- driving until reception improves.
Check the GPS signal reception (➞
Page 70) and the position of the GPS
lowing reasons:
Keep the antenna clear.
• The GPS antenna is in an unsuita-
ble location.
• Obstacles are blocking signals
from the satellites.
• The position of satellites relative to
your vehicle is bad.
• Signals from the GPS satellites
have been modified to reduce
accuracy. (GPS satellites are oper-
ated by the US Department of
Defense, and the US government
reserves the right to distort posi-
tioning data for military reasons.
This may lead to greater position-
ing errors.)
• If a vehicle phone or cellular phone
is used near the GPS antenna, GPS
reception may be lost temporarily.
Something covers the GPS antenna. Do not cover the GPS antenna with
spray paint or vehicle wax, because
this may block the reception of GPS
signals. Snow buildup can also
degrade the signals.
Signals from the vehicle’s speed
pulse are not being picked up prop-
erly.
Check that the cables are properly
connected. If necessary, consult the
dealer that installed the system.
The navigation system may not be
mounted securely in your vehicle.
Check that the navigation system is
securely mounted and, if necessary,
consult the dealer that installed the
system.
148
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
Your vehicle is operating in Simple
hybrid mode.
Connect the speed signal input (pink
lead wire) of the power cable cor-
rectly, and reset the 3D Hybrid Sen-
sor memory (“Learning Status”).
The navigation system is installed
Confirm the installation angle. (The
with an extreme angle exceeding the navigation system must be installed
limitation of the installation angle.
within the allowed installation angle.
For details, refer to “Installation Man-
ual”.)
Indication of the position of your vehi- Check whether or not the reverse
cle is misaligned after a U-turn or
reversing.
gear signal input lead (Violet) is con-
nected properly. (The navigation sys-
tem works properly without the lead
connected, but positioning accuracy
will be adversely affected.)
The map continually reorients itself.
Tracking marks are not displayed.
The traveling direction is set to Head- Touch
on the screen and change
ing Up.
the map display.
The “Tracking Display” is turned
off.
Check the “Tracking Display” set-
tings (➞ Page 75) and make sure
“Always” or “This Trip” is selected.
The daylight display is used even
when the vehicle lights are on.
“Daytime” is set to “Day/Night Dis- Check the “Day/Night Display” set-
play”.
“Nighttime” is selected.
The orange/white lead is not con-
nected.
Check the connection.
The system will not switch on or will Installation or connection has been
Check with your dealer.
not operate.
carried out incorrectly.
The display is very dim.
The vehicle’s light is turned ON, and Read about the “Day/Night Dis-
“Nighttime” is selected on “Day/
play” setting (➞ Page 75) and, if
Night Display”.
desired, select “Daytime”.
The vehicle cabin temperature is
extremely low.
A Liquid Crystal Display (LCD) is
used, and such displays tend to
darken when cold. Wait for the vehi-
cle to warm up.
Picture quality adjustment of the dis- Refer to “Operating the Picture
play is not correct.
Adjustment” to adjust the picture
quality.
No sounds are heard.
The volume level will not rise.
The volume level is low.
Adjust the volume level.
Turn the attenuator or mute off.
Check the connection.
Turn the volume up or down accord-
ing to “Volume” (➞ Page 73) in the
“Settings” menu.
The attenuator or mute is on.
The speaker lead is disconnected.
You cannot adjust them with the
Adjusting the volume of navigation
guidance and beeps is not possible. VOLUME knob.
A strange sound is heard when the
vehicle comes close to a certain
place. (E.g. Dog barking)
The sound for the entry of “Address Set the sound setting of that entry to
Book” is set.
“No Sound”. (➞ Page 57)
Slope is not displayed on the
Vehicle Dynamics screen.
Inclination does not move on the 3D
Calibration screen.
The speed pulse lead is not con-
nected.
Connect the speed pulse lead.
The person on the other end of the
The voice from the person on the
Use the following methods to reduce
phone call cannot hear the conversa- other end of the phone call is output the echo.
tion due to an echo.
from the speakers and then picked
up by the microphone again, creat-
ing an echo.
— Lower the volume on the receiver
— Have both speakers pause
slightly before speaking
149
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
When the screen is frozen...
Park your vehicle in a safe place, and cut off the engine. Turn the ignition key back to “Acc off”. Then
start the engine again, and turn the power to the navigation system back on. If this does not solve the
problem, press the RESET button on the navigation system.
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
Playback is not possible.
The disc is dirty.
Clean disc.
The loaded disc is a type your naviga- Check what type the disc is.
tion system cannot play.
A non-compatible video system disc Change to a disc compatible to your
is loaded.
video system.
There’s no picture.
The parking brake cord is not con-
nected.
Connect the parking brake cord, and
apply the parking brake.
The parking brake is not applied.
Connect the parking brake cord, and
apply the parking brake.
The audio and video skip.
The navigation system is not firmly
secured.
Secure the navigation system firmly.
Rear display picture disappears.
The source disc being listened to in
the navigation system has been
ejected.
Before ejecting the disc, switch the
source. This problem may occur
when certain connection methods
are used.
There was a problem with the rear
Check the rear display and its con-
display or a faulty wiring connection. nection.
The source without a video is
selected.
Switch the source with a video.
Problems in the AV screen (during DVD-Video playback)
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
CD or DVD playback is not possible. The disc is inserted upside down.
The disc is dirty.
Insert the disc with the label upward.
Clean disc.
The disc is cracked or otherwise
damaged.
Insert a normal, round disc.
The files on the “CD (DVD)” are an
irregular file format.
The “CD (DVD)” format cannot be
played back.
Check the file format.
Replace disc.
The loaded disc is a type this system Check what type the disc is. ( Also
cannot play.
see “Handling and Care of the Disc”
for more cautions about handling
each type of media.)
No picture.
The parking brake lead is not con-
nected or applied.
Connect a parking brake lead cor-
rectly, and apply the parking brake.
Parking brake interlock is activated.
Park your vehicle in a safe place and
apply the parking brake.
➲
“Parking brake interlock” ➞
Page 13
The “AV1 Input” or “AV2 Input” set- Please read the following page and
ting is incorrect.
set the setting correctly.
➞ Page 131
The audio skips.
The navigation system is not firmly
secured.
Secure the navigation system firmly.
“Rear display” picture disappears.
There was a problem with the “Rear
display” or a faulty wiring connec-
tion, for example.
Check the “Rear display” and its con-
nection.
150
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
“DVD/DivX Setup” is carried out
You can not display the video image
to “Rear display” during “DVD/DivX
Setup” menu.
Nothing is displayed and the touch
panel keys cannot be used.
The setting for the rear view camera Connect a rear view camera cor-
is incorrect.
rectly.
The shift lever was placed in [R]
when the rear view camera was not
connected.
Press the MAP button to return to
the map screen first and display AV
MENU and then switch Camera to
“Off” in the System menu.
➲
About “Camera” setting ➞
Page 131
The back light of the LCD panel is
turned off.
Turn on the back light.
➞ Page 133
Touch panel key is not responding or Touch keys deviate from the actual
a different key is responding.
Perform the touch panel calibration.
positions that respond to your touch “Adjusting the Response Positions of
for some reason.
the Touch Panels (Touch Panel Cali-
bration)” ➞ Page 137
“NO SIGNAL” is displayed at the right While waiting for a response from
Wait for a while and try the operation
again.
corner on the map.
the XM tuner.
You are in an area that cannot
receive XM tuner reception.
Move into an area that can receive
XM tuner reception.
Your current location provides very
poor reception.
Change your location.
“UPDATING” is displayed at the right Service subscription is either
Since the GEX-P10XMT is capable of
receiving both XM audio and XM
NavTraffic service, if you are sub-
scribed to only one or the other, the
system checks to see if you have
added another service to your
corner on the map.
XM audio only or XM NavTraffic
stand alone.
account since you last powered on
the navigation system. When you
subscribe to both services, this mes-
sage will stop appearing when you
turn the ignition ON (ACC ON).
No sounds are heard.
Cables are not connected correctly.
Connect the cables correctly.
The volume level will not rise.
The system is performing still, slow
motion, or frame-by-frame playback
with DVD-Video.
There is no sound during still, slow
motion, or frame-by-frame playback
with DVD-Video.
fast rewind or forward during the
MP3/WMA/ACC disc playback.
sound on fast rewind or forward.
The icon
tion is not possible.
is displayed, and opera- The operation is not compatible with This operation is not possible. (For
the DVD’s configuration.
example, the DVD playing does not
feature that angle, audio system,
subtitle language, etc.)
The picture stops (pauses) and the
unit cannot be operated.
Reading of data has become impos- After touching once, start play-
sible during DVD playback. back once more.
The picture is stretched, the aspect is The aspect setting is incorrect for the Select the appropriate setting for that
incorrect. display. image.
➲
“Changing the Wide Screen
Mode” ➞ Page 132
➲
“Setting the aspect ratio” ➞
Page 127
A parental lock message is displayed Parental lock is on.
and DVD playback is not possible.
Turn parental lock off or change the
level (➞ Page 127).
Parental lock for DVD playback can- The code number is incorrect.
not be canceled.
Input the correct code number. (➞
Page 127).
151
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
Playback is not with the audio lan-
guage and subtitle language settings dialog or subtitles in the language
selected in “DVD/DivX Setup”.
The DVD playing does not feature
Switching to a selected language is
not possible if the language selected
in “DVD/DivX Setup” is not
recorded on the disc.
selected in “DVD/DivX Setup”.
Switching the viewing angle is not
possible.
The DVD playing does not feature
scenes shot from multiple angles.
You cannot switch between multiple
angles if the DVD does not feature
scenes recorded from multiple
angles.
You are trying to switch to multiple
angle viewing of a scene that is not
recorded from multiple angles.
Switch between multiple angles
when watching scenes recorded
from multiple angles.
The picture is extremely unclear/dis- The disc features a signal to prohibit Since the navigation system is com-
torted and dark during playback.
copying. (Some discs may have this.) patible with the copy guard analog
copy protect system, when playing a
disc that has a signal prohibiting
copying, the picture may suffer from
horizontal stripes or other imperfec-
tions when viewed on some displays.
This does not mean the navigation
system is malfunctioning.
Problems in the AV screen (during iPod playback)
Symptom
Cause
Action (See)
Cannot be operated.
The iPod is frozen.
• Reconnect the iPod with the inter-
face cable for iPod (sold sepa-
®
rately).
•Update the iPod version.
The authorization error has occurred. • Reconnect the iPod with the inter-
®
face cable for iPod (sold sepa-
rately).
• Set the ACC to Off and set it to On
again.
• Update the iPod version.
Messages and how to react to them
The following messages may be displayed by your navigation system.
❒ There are occasions when you may see error messages other than those shown here. In such a
case, follow the instructions given on the display.
Message
When
What to do
Please insert the appropriate disc.
If you try to use a disc which is
incompatible with this system.
Insert a suitable disc.
This is not the appropriate disc.
Please insert the appropriate disc.
If you insert a disc upside down.
If the disc is dirty.
Insert the disc with the label upward.
Clean the disc.
If the disc is cracked or otherwise
damaged.
Insert a normal, round disc.
Irregular speed pulse signal is
detected. Please power off the sys-
tem and check the installation. After
you have checked, please re-boot the
system and press “OK”.
If the navigation system does not
receive the vehicle speed pulse.
Consult your Pioneer dealer.
152
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message
When
What to do
Speed pulse wire is not connected.
System will start to learn without
speed pulse. Please keep in mind
that accuracy is not fully ensured
without speed pulse.
The speed signal input (pink lead
wire) of the power cable is not con-
nected.
To operate with 3D hybrid mode, con-
nect the speed signal input (pink
lead wire) of the power cable cor-
rectly.
Although it can be operated with
Simple hybrid mode without con-
necting the speed signal input, the
precision of the positioning will be
less accurate.
Vibration is detected. Please power
The navigation unit is installed in a
Re-install the navigation unit in a
place where the unit will not be
affected by vibration.
off the system and check the installa- place where it may be affected by a
tion. After you have checked, please large vibration.
re-boot the system and press “OK”.
Direction of G sensor is not correct.
Please power off the system and
check the installation. After you have
checked, please re-boot the system
and press “OK”.
Direction of G sensor is set incor-
rectly.
See the “Installation Manual” and set
the direction of the navigation unit
correctly.
Gyro Sensor is not working properly. Abnormal output is detected from
Please consult your dealer or Pioneer the Gyrosensor.
service center.
Note down the error code shown on
the screen. Turn off the power, and
then contact your nearest Pioneer
service facility.
This function is not available now.
The screen cannot be displayed with If the sensor learning status reaches
Vehicle Dynamics Display.
Because the sensor has not been
taught so the sensor information
cannot be acquired.
the Sensor Initializing status, the sys-
tem is ready to be used.
System detected that the vertical
angle of the installation has been
changed. Learning status for Gyro
Sensor has been initialized.
If the mounting angle of the naviga-
tion unit has been changed.
The system initializes the sensor in
order to operate it with the maximum
performance and automatically
starts re-learning.
System detected that the vertical
The navigation system is installed
Confirm the installation angle. (The
angle of the installation exceeds the with an extreme angle exceeding the navigation system must be installed
permission level. Please install the
navigation unit correctly.
limitation of the installation angle.
within the allowed installation angle.
For details refer to Installation Man-
ual.)
No data available at this time.
No XM signal. Please wait.
If no data is available that can be
used with the XM tuner.
While waiting for a response from
the XM tuner.
Wait for a while and try the operation
again.
Wait for a while and try the operation
again.
You are in an area that cannot
receive XM tuner reception.
Move into an area that can receive
XM tuner reception.
Your current location provides very
poor reception.
Change your location.
XM updating. Please wait.
Service subscription is either
XM audio only or XM NavTraffic
stand alone.
Since the GEX-P10XMT is capable of
receiving both XM audio and XM
NavTraffic service, if you are sub-
scribed to only one or the other, the
system checks to see if you have
added another service to your
account since you last powered on
the navigation system. When you
subscribe to both services, this mes-
sage will stop appearing when you
turn the ignition ON (ACC ON).
Radio is being updated with the lat-
est encryption code.
Wait until the encryption code is fully
updated.
UPDATING
The selected channel is not included Select another channel.
in your subscription.
Radio is being updated with the lat-
est encryption code.
Wait until the encryption code is fully
updated.
153
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message
When
What to do
Route calculation was not possible.
Route calculation has failed because • Change the destination.
of a malfunction of map data, soft-
ware, hardware or disc.
• Clean the disc.
• Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if
this message persists.
Route calculation was not possible
because the destination is too far.
The destination is too far.
• Set a destination closer to the start-
ing point.
• Set one or more way points.
Route calculation was not possible
because the destination is too near.
The destination or way point(s) are
too close.
Set a destination or way point(s) far-
ther from the starting point.
Route calculation was not possible
due to traffic regulations.
• The destination or way point(s) are • Set a destination and way point(s)
in a Control Traffic Zone (CTR) and
the route calculation is hampered.
• Your vehicle is currently in a Con-
trol Traffic Zone (CTR) and the
outside the CTR if you know where
the restricted area is.
• Try a destination or way point(s)
away from the currently set points
to some extent.
route calculation is hampered.
• Drive your vehicle to an unre-
stricted area and reset the destina-
tion and way point(s).
Route calculation was not possible
because no guidance can be pro-
vided around the destination or the
starting point.
The destination, way point(s) or start- • Set a destination and way point(s)
ing point are in an area where no on roads.
road exists (e.g. a mountain) and the • Reset the destination after you
route calculation is impossible. drive the vehicle to any road.
There is no route to the destination.
The destination or way point(s) are on Change the destination.
an isolated island, etc. without a ferry
and the route calculation is impossi-
ble.
The route could not avoid the speci-
fied area.
If route setting cannot avoid speci-
fied Areas to Avoid.
If the current route is not desired, set
a destination or way point(s) that do
not pass through the Areas to
Avoid.
The route could not avoid the speci-
fied area.
Toll road has not been avoided.
If the route to the destination or way If the current route is not desired, set
point(s) cannot be established by
bypassing toll roads (including toll
areas) and Areas to Avoid.
a destination or way point(s) that do
not pass through toll roads (includ-
ing toll areas) and Areas to Avoid.
Ferry has not been avoided.
In case a ferry route was included in If the current route is not desired, set
the route to the destination or way
point(s) even though “Avoid Ferry”
was set to On.
a destination or way point(s) that do
not pass through a ferry route.
Toll road has not been avoided.
If the route to the destination or way If the current route is not desired, set
point(s) cannot be established by
bypassing toll roads (including toll
areas).
a destination or way point(s) that do
not pass through toll roads (includ-
ing toll areas).
The address does not exist.
Do you want to continue?
If the house number is entered with- Re-enter the existing house number
out specifying city or street and that by following the instructions shown
house number does not exist on the on the screen.
data.
Or, proceed to the next step without
entering the house number and
specify the city or street first.
There is no applicable data for the
selected city. Automatically returning not be used (for example, if the his-
If the history data of the city could
Once the search is performed to
specify the city, the result is saved as
to list.
tory data of the city that was used in a history. The data of the specified
the POI Search cannot be found in city, however, may not be hit by the
the Address Search.)
different search criteria. In this case,
try another search method or change
the destination.
There is no Freeway in this area.
If no freeway was found in the
selected Zone.
Set the destination or way points
using another search method or
change the location of the destina-
tion or way point(s).
154
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message
When
What to do
This area does not contain any POI’s Vicinity Search cannot be per-
Replace the DVD Map Disc and per-
form the Vicinity Search again.
of the selected type.
formed because the searched loca-
tion is in areas not stored on the DVD
Map Disc.
Facilities of the selected category do Use another search method or move
not exist in the surrounding areas.
to another location and perform the
Vicinity Search again.
Only City Center can be searched.
If POI Search was performed on
areas not stored on the DVD Map
Disc.
Only the City Center can be
searched. If you want to search other
categories in areas not stored on the
disc, replace the DVD Map Disc and
perform the POI Search again.
Set the areas stored on the DVD Map
Disc to destination or way points.
This zone is not available on this disc. When areas not stored on the DVD
Set the destination or way point(s) in
Please insert appropriate disc.
Map Disc are included in the search. the areas stored on the DVD Map
Disc, or replace the DVD Map Disc
and perform the search again.
Failed to make the route profile.
Failed to generate the route profile
because the set route passes
through areas not stored on the DVD
Map Disc.
Insert the DVD Map Disc and retry.
The maximum number of registra-
tions has been completed. Please
clear existing registered items and
re-register current item.
If there are already 300 items when
you attempt to register an item in the register again.
Address Book.
Delete unnecessary data and try to
Memory is full.
When a total of 300 registered points Delete unnecessary data on the sys-
are in the disc and Address Book,
you attempt moving an item to the
Address Book from the disc.
tem and try to register again or
reduce currently selected items.
There is no /PICTURES/ folder.
Cannot load the image because the
Use the appropriate data after read-
ing “Changing Background Picture”
on page 68.
Insert the disc that contains the
background pictures.
Please create /PICTURES/ folder and PICTURES folder is not found in the
store JPEG files in that Folder. inserted disc.
There is no Disc. Please insert a Disc The disc in which the background
with JPEG files stored in the /PIC-
TURES/ folder.
picture is stored is not correctly
inserted.
Data read error. Change is canceled. Failed to read the data because the
Try re-reading the data by inserting a
disc is damaged or dirty. Or, the pick- clean disc.
up lens of the DVD drive is dirty.
Clean the pick-up lens with a com-
mercially available cleaning kit for
DVD, then try to reading again.
JPEG file is corrupt. Change is can-
celed.
The data is damaged or an attempt
was made to set a JPEG image that
does not conform to specifications
as the background picture.
Use the appropriate data after read-
ing “Changing Background Picture”
on page 68.
Data Read error. Back to Original
Background.
Please do not turn power off.
Failed to read the data because the
disc is damaged or dirty. Or, the pick- clean disc.
up lens of the DVD drive is dirty.
Try re-reading the data by inserting a
Clean the pick-up lens with a com-
mercially available cleaning kit for
DVD, then try to reading again.
There are no files available in /PIC-
TURES/ folder.
The PICTURES folder exists on the
disc but no data in JPEG format
exists.
Use the appropriate data after read-
ing “Changing Background Picture”
on page 68.
Please insert the appropriate disc.
Route calculation was not possible.
In the memory navi mode, if the
Auto-reroute does not function for
some reason.
Insert the DVD Map Disc.
No route data can be stored. You
should insert the disc that contains
the map data of the current position. Map Disc”.
The area to be set for “Map in Mem- • Change the memory area to be set
ory” is “areas not stored on the DVD
to “areas stored on the DVD Map
Disc”.
• Insert the DVD Map Disc contain-
ing that area.
155
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Message
When
What to do
• Scaling down.
• Scaling up.
In the memory navi mode, if the DVD The scale automatically returns to
Map Disc is inserted without chang- the scale that was set in the DVD
ing the scale (only when the point is navi mode before being changed to
stored on the DVD Map Disc).
the memory navi mode.
• No map data available on this
scale. Scaling up.
• No map data available on this
scale. Scaling down.
When the scale that had been previ- If the desired scale cannot be
ously displayed cannot be displayed selected, insert the DVD Map Disc
for the following reasons:
that contains that area and then
change the scale.
• The disc was ejected and the sys-
tem was changed to the memory
navi mode.
• In the memory navi mode, the map
was scrolled to outside the memory
area. Or, the vehicle moved outside
of the memory area.
• The map was scrolled to areas not
stored on the DVD Map Disc. Or,
the vehicle moved to unrecorded
areas.
• The map was scrolled from unre-
corded areas to the memory area.
Or, the vehicle moved from unre-
corded areas to the memory area.
Failure in the memory recovery proc- Failed to complete the recovery of the • Clean the disc.
ess.
memory area because the disc could • Clean the DVD drive.
Memory navigation is presently not
possible.
not be read for some reason, result-
ing in deletion of the memory.
• Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if
this message persists.
The map data could not be stored.
Previous setting will be kept.
Recovery was performed for the
memory area after failing to read the • Clean the DVD drive.
disc data for some reason. (The
memory area that was previously set
will be recovered.)
• Clean the disc.
• Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if
this message persists.
This function is not available with the The current position is “areas not
current map disc.
Zoom in again after the vehicle
stored on the DVD Map Disc” and an moves into an area stored on the
attempt was made to zoom in to
make the scale 0.5 mile or more.
DVD Map Disc.
Or, replace the DVD Map Disc and
try to zoom in again.
Failed to save to memory. Please re- The settings could not be saved for
• Retry.
enter setting.
some reason.
• Consult the Pioneer Local dealer if
this message persists.
CAUTION!
Parking brake lead is incorrectly con- Confirm once more that their con-
System detected improper connec-
tion of Parking Brake lead.
Please check your configuration for
safety.
nected.
nections are correct.
Please see Operation Manual for
more information regarding safe
operation.
Viewing of front seat video source
while driving is strictly prohibited.
Parking brake interlock is activated.
Park your vehicle in the safe place
and apply the parking brake.
➲
Parking brake interlock ➞
Page 13
156
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Error Messages
When problems occur with disc playback, an error message appears on the display. Refer to the table
below to identify the problem, then take the suggested corrective action. If the error persists, contact
your dealer or your nearest PIONEER Service Center.
The messages in “( )” will appear on the “Rear display”.
Message
Cause
Action (See)
Reading error
Dirty
Clean disc.
(ERROR-02-XX)
Scratched disc
The disc is loaded upside down
Electrical or mechanical
Replace disc.
Check that the disc is loaded correctly.
Press the RESET button. (Refer to page 20
Mechanism error
in this manual.)
Region code error
(DIFFERENT REGION
DISC)
The disc does not have the same region
number as the navigation system
Replace the DVD-Video with one bearing the
correct region number.
NON-PLAYABLE DISC This type of disc cannot be played by the
navigation system
Replace the disc with one the navigation sys-
tem can play.
Thermal error
(THERMAL PROTEC-
TION IN MOTION)
The temperature of the navigation system is Wait until the unit’s temperature returns to
outside of the normal operating range
within normal operating limits.
Error not defined
(ERROR-FF-FF)
Undefined error
Press the RESET button (Refer to page 20 in
this manual.)
Non-playable tracks
are skipped.
Files that are protected by digital rights
management.
The protected files are skipped.
(FILE SKIPPED)
Impossible to play all
tracks. (PROCETED
DISC,DRM Protected)
All the files on the inserted disc are secured Replace disc.
by DRM.
Flash writing error.
Impossible to write on not be saved for some reason.
the flash. (CAN NOT
The playback history for VOD contents can- • Try saving again.
• If the message appears frequently, consult
your dealer.
SAVE DATA)
Authorization Error
(AUTHORIZATION
ERROR)
The device does not match the device regis- Check whether this device has been regis-
tered with the VOD provider. VOD contents tered with the VOD provider.
cannot be played back.
NON-PLAYABLE FILE
VOD rental contents file error
• Try saving again.
• If the message appears frequently, consult
your dealer.
Played back a disc with incompatible for-
mat.
Playback a disc with compatible format.
ERROR-11
ERROR-21
Connected an iPod with no charge.
• Turn “iPod Charge” is “On” and recon-
nect the iPod.
• Connect a charged iPod.
The iPod version is not compatible.
Use an iPod with a compatible version.
157
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Handling and Care of the Disc
DVD-Video
• With some DVD-Video discs, it may not be pos-
sible to use certain functions.
• It may not be possible to play back some DVD-
Video discs.
Some basic precautions are necessary when
handling your discs.
DVD Map Discs
• Do not use discs other than those intended for
this product. Use only discs approved by Pio-
neer.
DVD-R/-RW and CD-R/-RW
• Playback is possible only for discs which have
been finalized.
❒ If you wish to use other DVD Map Discs,
first check that they are compatible with
this equipment and approved by Pioneer.
• Playback of discs finalized on a personal com-
puter may not be possible depending on the
application settings and the environment.
Please finalized with the correct format. (For
details, contact the manufacturer of the appli-
cation.)
• It may not be possible to playback discs
recorded on a music CD recorder, DVD
recorder or a personal computer because of
disc characteristics, scratches or dirt on the
disc, or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of
this product.
DVD drive and care
• Use only normal, round discs. If you insert
irregular, non-round, shaped discs they may
jam in the DVD drive or not play properly.
• Playback of discs may become impossible in
case of direct exposure to sunlight, high tem-
peratures, or the storage conditions in the vehi-
cle.
• Titles and other text information recorded on a
disc may not be displayed by this product.
• If you insert a CD-RW/DVD-RW disc into this
product, time to playback will be longer than
when you insert a conventional CD/DVD or CD-
R/DVD-R disc.
• Check all discs for cracks, scratches or warp-
ing before playing. Discs that have cracks,
scratches or are warped may not play properly.
Do not use such discs.
• Avoid touching the recorded (non-printed side)
surface when handling the disc.
• Store discs in their cases when not in use.
• Keep discs out of direct sunlight and do not
expose the discs to high temperatures.
• Do not attach labels, write on or apply chemi-
cals to the surface of the discs.
• Read the precautions with the package of
discs before using them.
• When DVD-R/DVD-RW discs are used, play-
back is possible only for discs which have been
recorded with the Video format (video mode). It
is not possible to play back DVD-R/RW discs
which have been recorded with the Video
Recording format (VR mode).
• To clean dirt from a disc, wipe the disc with a
soft cloth outward from the center of the disc.
• It may not be possible to play back DVD-R/
DVD-RW discs which have been recorded with
the Video format (video mode), because of disc
characteristics, scratches or dirt on the disc,
or dirt, condensation, etc. on the lens of this
product.
• It is not possible to read DVD-ROM discs other
than Pioneer DVD map discs or DVD-ROMs
with MP3, WMA, AAC, or DivX files burned to
it.
• If the heater is used in cold weather, condensa-
tion may form on components inside the DVD
drive. Condensation may cause the DVD drive
to not operate properly. If you think that con-
densation is a problem turn off the DVD drive
for an hour or so to allow the DVD drive to dry
out and wipe any damp discs with a soft cloth
to remove the moisture.
• This product can play back the disc that final-
ized with the following file systems (logical for-
mat);
• Road shocks may interrupt disc playback.
158
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
CD: ISO9660 level 1 and level 2, Romeo and
Joliet
DVD: ISO9660 level 1 and level 2, Romeo,
Joliet, UDF1.02.
• When you burn a CD-R/-RW and DVD-R/-RW,
make sure the total data size of the CD-R/-RW
and DVD-R/-RW is greater than the amount
noted below by storing dummy data or other
filler information. Otherwise, the disc may not
be recognized by the built-in DVD drive.
— CD-R/-RW: 1.8 MB
each one, regardless of the length of the pause
between tracks on the original audio CD.
• The sound quality of MP3/WMA/AAC files gen-
erally becomes better with an increased bit
rate. In order to be able to enjoy sound of a cer-
tain quality, we recommend using discs
recorded with a higher bit rate.
• This unit plays back files with the filename
extension (.mp3, .wma or .m4a) as a MP3/
WMA/AAC file. To prevent noise and malfunc-
tions, do not use these extensions for files
other than MP3/WMA/AAC files.
— DVD-R/-RW: 170 MB
MP3 additional information
• Files are compatible with the ID3 Tag Ver. 1.0,
1.1, 2.2, 2.3 and 2.4 formats for display of
album (disc title), track (track title), artist (track
artist) and comments. Ver. 2.x of ID3 Tag is
given priority when both Ver. 1.x and Ver. 2.x
exist.
• You can play back MP3 files in the frequencies
from 8 kHz to 48 kHz.
• This unit is compatible with the emphasis
function.
• There is no m3u playlist compatibility.
• There is no compatibility with the MP3i (MP3
interactive) or mp3 PRO formats.
• This unit can play recordings with bit rates
from 8 kbps to 320 kbps.
MP3, WMA and AAC files
• WMA data can be encoded by using Windows
Media Player version 7 or later.
• This unit may not operate correctly depending
on the application used to encode WMA files.
• Depending on the version of Windows Media
Player used to encode WMA files, album
names and other text information may not be
correctly displayed.
• There may be a slight delay when starting play-
back of WMA/AAC files encoded with image
data.
• It is possible to play back multi-session com-
patible recorded discs.
• MP3/WMA/AAC files are not compatible with
packet write data transfer.
• The maximum number of characters for the file
and folder name is 64 characters, including
extension (.mp3, .wma, .m4a). However the
navigation system uses proportional font.
Therefore, the number of the characters that
you can display varies according to the width
of each character.
• In case of files recorded according to the
Romeo file system, only the first 64 characters
can be displayed.
• The folder selection sequence for playback and
other operations becomes the writing
sequence used by the writing software. For this
reason, the expected sequence at the time of
playback may not coincide with the actual play-
back sequence. However, there also is some
writing software which permits setting of the
playback order.
• Some audio CDs contain tracks that merge
into one another without a pause. When these
discs are converted to MP3/WMA/AAC files
and burned to a disc, the files will be played
back on this player with a short pause between
WMA additional information
• This unit plays back WMA files encoded by
Windows Media Player version 7, 7.1, 8, 9 and
10.
• You can play back WMA files in the frequen-
cies from 8 kHz to 48 kHz.
• This unit can play recordings with bit rates
from 5 kbps to 320 kbps.
• This unit doesn’t support the following for-
mats.
— Windows Media Audio 9 Professional
(5.1ch)
— Windows Media Audio 9 Lossless
— Windows Media Audio 9 Voice
AAC additional information
• This unit plays back AAC files encoded by
iTunes® version 4.6.
• This unit plays back AAC files in the sampling
frequencies from 8 kHz to 48 kHz.
• This unit can play recordings with transmis-
sion rates from 8 kbps to 320 kbps.
159
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
About folders and MP3/WMA/AAC files
• An outline of a disc with MP3/WMA/AAC files
on it is shown below. Subfolders are shown as
folders in the folder currently selected.
DivX video files
• This unit corresponds to DivX video format
implemented in relation to DivX standards.
However, it does not correspond to DivX Ultra
standards.
• This unit corresponds to MP3 and AC3 audio
codec.
❒ The following figure is an example of the tier
structure in the disc. The numbers in the fig-
ure indicate the order in which folder num-
bers are assigned and the order to be played
back.
• DivX files without video data cannot be recog-
nized as DivX file.
• Depending on the file information composition
such as the number of audio stream, there
may be a slight delay in the start of playback on
discs.
• Some special operation may be prohibited
because of the composition of DivX files.
• DivX files downloaded only from DivX partner
site are guarantee of proper operation. Unau-
thorized DivX file may not operate properly.
• DRM rental file cannot be operated until start-
ing playing back.
Indicates the order in which folder numbers
are assigned.
Indicates each file. The number is assigned in
the order of the track to be played back.
• This unit corresponds to a DivX file display up
to 1 590 minutes 43 seconds. Also, search
operation beyond this time limit is prohibited.
• This unit corresponds to media with a maxi-
mum image size of 720
✕
576 pixels.
• If a file contains more than 4 GB, playback is
stopped on the way.
• Files with high transfer rates may not be played
back correctly. The standard transfer rate is 4
Mbps for CDs and 10.08 Mbps for DVDs.
• DivX VOD file playback requires ID code of this
unit to DivX VOD provider. About ID code, refer
to Displaying your DivX® VOD registration
code on page 128.
• Plays all versions of DivX® video (including
DivX® 6) with standard playback of DivX®
media files
• For more details about DivX, visit the following
site:
1
2
3
http://www.divx.com/
1 First tier
2 Second tier
3 Third tier
Important
• When naming a DivX video file, add the corre-
sponding filename extension (.avi or .divx).
• This unit plays back files with the filename
extension (.avi or .divx) as a DivX video file. To
prevent noise and malfunctions, do not use
these extensions for files other than DivX video
files.
Notes:
• This unit assigns folder numbers. The user
cannot assign folder numbers.
• It is not possible to check folders that do not
include MP3/WMA/AAC files. (These folders
will be skipped without displaying the folder
number.)
• It is possible to play back up to 255 folders on
one disc.
160
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DivX subtitle files
• Srt format subtitle files with the extension “.srt”
can be used.
Using the Navigation System
Correctly
• Only one subtitle file can be used for each DivX
file. Multiple subtitle files cannot be associ-
ated.
• If liquid or foreign matter should get inside
this navigation system, turn off the power
immediately and consult your dealer or the
nearest authorized PIONEER Service Sta-
tion. Do not use the navigation system in
this condition because doing so may result
in a fire, electric shock, or other failure.
• If you notice smoke, a strange noise or
smell from the navigation system, or any
other abnormal signs on the LCD screen,
turn off the power immediately and con-
sult your dealer or the nearest authorized
PIONEER Service Station. Using this navi-
gation system in this condition may result
in permanent damage to the system.
• Do not disassemble or modify this naviga-
tion system, as there are high-voltage
components inside which may cause an
electric shock. Be sure to consult your
dealer or the nearest authorized PIONEER
Service Station for internal inspection,
adjustments or repairs.
• Subtitle files that are named with the same
character string as the DivX file before the
extension are associated with the DivX file. The
character strings before the extension must be
exactly the same. However, if there is only one
DivX file and one subtitle file in a single folder,
the files are associated even if the file names
are not the same.
• The subtitle file must be stored in the same
folder as the DivX file.
• Up to 255 subtitle files may be used. Any more
subtitle files will not be recognized.
• Up to 64 characters can be used for the name
of the subtitle file, including the extension. If
more than 64 characters are used for the file
name, the subtitle file may not be recognized.
• The character code for the subtitle file should
comply with ISO-8859-1. Using characters
other than ISO-8859-1 may cause the charac-
ters to be displayed incorrectly.
• The subtitles may not be displayed correctly if
the displayed characters in the subtitle file
include control code.
• For materials that use a high transfer rate, the
subtitles and video may not be completely syn-
chronized.
• If multiple subtitles are programmed to display
within a very short time frame, such as 0.1 sec-
onds, the subtitles may not be displayed at the
correct time.
Handling the LCD screen
• When the LCD screen is subjected to direct
sunlight for a long period of time, it will
become very hot resulting in possible damage
to the LCD screen. When not using this naviga-
tion system, avoid exposing it to direct sunlight
as much as possible.
Ambient conditions for playing a
disc
• At extremely high temperatures, a temperature
cutout protects this product by switching it off
automatically.
• Despite our careful design of the product,
small scratches that do not affect actual opera-
tion may appear on the disc surface as a result
of mechanical wear, ambient conditions for
use or handling of the disc. This is not a sign of
the malfunction of this product. Consider it to
be normal wear and tear.
• The display unit should be used within the tem-
perature ranges shown below.
— Operating temperature range: +14 °F to
+122 °F
— Storage temperature range: –4 °F to
+176 °F
• Do not use the LCD screen at temperatures
higher or lower than the operating temperature
range because the LCD screen may not oper-
ate normally and the LCD screen can be dam-
aged.
• The LCD screen is exposed in order to increase
its visibility within the vehicle. Please do not
press strongly on it as this may damage it.
161
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
• Do not push the LCD screen with excessive
force as this may scratch it.
low temperatures reduces the service life of
the fluorescent tube.)
• Never touch the LCD screen with anything
besides your finger when operating the Touch
Panel functions. The LCD screen can scratch
easily. (The stylus is supplied for special cali-
brations. Do not use the stylus for normal oper-
ation.)
— When the fluorescent tube reaches the end
of its useful life, the LCD screen will be dark
and the image will no longer be projected. If
this happens, consult your dealer or the
nearest authorized Pioneer service station.
Route Setting Information
Route search specifications
Your navigation system sets a route to your desti-
nation by applying certain built-in rules to the
map data. This section provides some useful
information about how a route is set.
Liquid crystal display (LCD)
screen
• If the LCD screen is near the vent of an air con-
ditioner, make sure that air from the air condi-
tioner is not blowing on it. Heat from the heater
may break the LCD screen, and cool air from
the cooler may cause moisture to form inside
the navigation unit resulting in possible dam-
age. Also, if the LCD screen is cooled down by
the cooler, the LCD screen may become dark
or the life span of the small fluorescent tube
used in the LCD screen may be shortened.
• Small black dots or white dots (bright dots)
may appear on the LCD screen. These are due
to the characteristics of the LCD screen and do
not indicate a problem with the LCD screen.
• At low temperatures, the LCD screen may be
dark for a while after the power is turned on.
• The LCD screen will be difficult to see if it is
exposed to direct sunlight.
• When a route is calculated, the route and
voice guidance for the route is automati-
cally set. Also, for day or time traffic regu-
lations, only information about traffic
regulations at the time when the route was
calculated is shown. One-way streets and
street closures may not be taken into con-
sideration. For example, if a street is open
during the morning only, but you arrive
later, it would be against the traffic regula-
route. When driving, please follow the
actual traffic signs. Also, the system may
not know some traffic regulations.
• When using a cellular phone, keep the
antenna of the cellular phone away from the
LCD screen to prevent disruption of the video
by the appearance of spots, colored stripes,
etc.
Keeping the LCD screen in good
condition
• When removing dust from the LCD screen or
cleaning the LCD screen, first turn the system
power off, then wipe with a soft dry cloth.
• When wiping the LCD screen, take care not to
scratch the surface. Do not use harsh or abra-
sive chemical cleaners.
About singular route calculation
When the calculation of only one route is set, you
can search a route option by combining the fol-
lowing conditions.
➲ How to set the calculation conditions ➞
Page 52
For example, when “Fast” and “Avoid Freeway”
(“On”) are combined, a route that avoids free-
ways and has the shortest travel time will be cal-
culated and displayed on the screen.
Condition 1: whether to put priority on dis-
tance or time
Small fluorescent tube
• A small fluorescent tube is used inside the dis-
play to illuminate the LCD screen.
— The fluorescent tube should last for approx-
imately 10 000 hours, depending on operat-
ing conditions. (Using the navigation unit at
Short:
Calculate a route with the shortest distance to
your destination as a priority.
162
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Fast:
• In some cases, guidance may direct you past
your destination and then indicate a U-turn to
get back to it.
Calculate a route with the shortest travel time to
your destination as a priority.
• In some cases, a route may begin on the oppo-
site side of a railway or river from your actual
current location. If this happens, drive towards
your destination for a while, and try route cal-
culation again.
• In the following cases, a route that passes
through an Area to Avoid may be set:
- when your vehicle is in the Area to Avoid
- when your destination or way points are in
the Area to Avoid
- when it is not possible to avoid doing so
• If a suitable route cannot be set in compliance
with the specified detour distance, or your pref-
erence to avoid freeways, toll roads or ferry
routes, the setting or parameter may be
ignored.
• When there is a traffic congestion or closure
ahead, if driving through the traffic congestion
or closure is better than taking the detour, a
detour route may not be set.
Condition 2: whether to use freeway or not
Avoid Freeway:
Calculate a route that avoids freeways. (A route
using the freeway may be set if your destination is
far away.)
• The system assumes that the driver deviated
either intentionally or inadvertently from the
route and searches for another route (intelli-
gent rerouting). Depending on the situation,
the system may search for a new route that
does not return to the original one.
• The calculated route is one example of the
route to your destination decided by the navi-
gation system while taking the type of streets
or traffic regulations into account. It is not nec-
essarily an optimum route. (In some cases, you
may not be able to set the streets you want to
pass. If you want to pass a certain street, set
the way point on that street.)
• There may be instances when the starting
point and the destination point are not on the
highlighted route.
• The route set by your navigation system is
based on the assumption that the driver does
not know the area. Thus, streets known to local
drivers, such as small streets or special roads,
may not be used for the set route.
• Some route options may become the same
route. If way points are set, only one route is
calculated.
• The number of traffic circle exits displayed on
the screen may differ from the actual number
of roads.
• If the intersection is approached in a gentle
curve, the map displayed may differ from the
actual road layout.
Auto Reroute
• Route setting is limited to the range of the disc
in use.
• Auto Reroute is used when you deviate more
than 0.01 mile (30m) from the route.
• The Auto Reroute function does not work in the
following cases:
• The destination is too far, there may be
instances where the route cannot be set. (If
you want to set a long-distance route going
across several areas, set way points along the
way.)
- when your vehicle is not on a street
- when you are very close to your destination
- when your vehicle is on a ferry
• During voice guidance, turns and intersections
from the freeway are announced. However,
some intersections, turns, and other guide
points may not be announced if they are
passed in rapid succession.
- when driving on a road inside a facility
- when driving on a traffic circle
- when your vehicle is out of Memory area
- when the vehicle goes out of the area stored
in the disc during DVD navigation mode
- when the vehicle goes out of the memorized
area during memory navi mode
• It is possible that guidance may direct you off a
freeway and then back on again.
• In some cases, the set route may require you to
travel in the opposite direction of your current
heading. In such cases, you are instructed to
turn around; please do so safely and in accor-
dance with local traffic rules.
- when driving on routes described in “Roads
not used in calculations”
163
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
the map (only the arrival guidance for the desti-
nation or a way point is available). Please review
and obey all local traffic rules along the high-
lighted route. (For your safety.)
No turn-by-turn directions or arrow icons will be
displayed on these roads.
Route highlighting
• Once set, the route is highlighted in bright
green or light blue on the map.
• The immediate vicinity of your starting point
and destination may not be highlighted, and
neither will areas with particularly complex
road layouts. Consequently, the route may
appear to be cut off on the display, but voice
guidance will continue.
When your vehicle reaches to the entrance of this
road, the icon
that guidance is not available for this type of road.
The icon will be indicated for the road with
will be displayed, indicating
Roads not used in calculations
Even though displayed onscreen, the following
roads are not included in route calculations.
• Stubble roads
which the guidance is available.
The Close-up of Junction function, Auto Reroute
function, Changing the view to Guide View, or
Route View are not available.
• Walkways
• Roads for public vehicles only
• Non routable road
Non routable roads (pink color
road)
Map display is possible, but it cannot be used for
route calculation. Please review and obey all local
traffic rules along this route. (For your safety.)
Tracking
the map in certain increments. This is called
tracking. It is handy when you want to check a
route traveled without guidance or if returning
along a complex route.
• A maximum of about 145 miles (230 km) is
marked and, as you travel beyond this limit,
tracking marks are erased, starting with the
oldest. The tracking display shows about 100
miles of vehicle tracking with white dots.
➲ Tracking can also be set to erase automati-
cally whenever the navigation system is
switched off. ➞ Page 75
Types of the Road Stored in the
Disc
There are three types of roads marked on the map
of this disc.
Roads included in the route
guidance and roads not included
Turn by Turn Routable Roads contain full
attribute data and can be used for full Route
Guidance. Pioneer navigation will display full
route guidance, including turn-by-turn voice
directions and arrow icons.
Routable roads (routes displayed and high-
lighted in purple) have only basic data and can
only be used to plot a navigable route. Pioneer
navigation will only display a navigable route on
164
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DivX Certified
Glossary
DivX Certified products are officially tested by the crea-
tors of DivX and guaranteed to play all versions of DivX
video, including DivX 6.
This glossary explains some of the terms used in
this manual.
Dolby Digital
3D Hybrid sensor
Dolby Digital provides multi-channel audio from up to
5.1 independent channels. This is the same as the Dolby
Digital surround sound system used in theaters.
The built-in sensor which enables the system to estimate
your vehicle’s position. A learning function increases its
accuracy and its learning data can be stored in memory.
DRM
AAC
This technology preserves the copyrights for digital data
by limiting the number of copies that can be made for
audio and video files.
AAC is short for Advanced Audio Coding and refers to an
audio compression technology standard used with
MPEG 2 and MPEG 4.
DVD Map Discs
The DVD-ROM disc contain Pioneer navigation software.
Map data is also recorded on the discs.
Address Book
A list of locations registered manually.
Aspect ratio
Favorite location
This is the width-to-height ratio of a TV screen. A regular
display has an aspect ratio of 4:3. Wide screen displays
have an aspect ratio of 16:9, providing a bigger picture
for exceptional presence and atmosphere.
A frequently visited location (such as your workplace or
a relative’s home) that you can register to allow easy
routing.
GPS
Bit rate
Global Positioning System. A network of satellites that
provides navigation signals for a variety of purposes.
This expresses data volume per second, or bps units
(bits per second). The higher the rate, the more informa-
tion is available to reproduce the sound. Using the same
encoding method (such as MP3), the higher the rate, the
better the sound.
Guidance mode
The mode in which guidance is given as you drive to your
destination; the system automatically switches to this
mode as soon as a route has been set.
Chapter
DVD titles are divided into chapters which are numbered
in the same way as the chapters of a book. With DVD-
Video discs featuring chapters, you can quickly find a
desired scene with chapter search.
Guidance point
These are important landmarks along your route, gener-
ally intersections. The next guidance point along your
route is indicated on the map by the yellow flag icon.
Current location
The present location of your vehicle; your current loca-
tion is shown on the map by a red triangle.
Home location
Your registered home location.
ID3 tag
This is a method of embedding track-related information
in a MP3 file. This embedded information can include
the track title, the artist’s name, the album title, the
music genre, the year of production, comments and
other data. The contents can be freely edited using soft-
ware with ID3 Tag editing functions. Although the tags
are restricted to the number of characters, the informa-
tion can be viewed when the track is played back.
Default setting
A factory setting which applies when you first switch on
the system; you can change default settings to suit your
own needs in the Route Options menu or the Settings
menu.
Destination
A location you choose as the end point of your journey.
DivX
DivX is a popular media technology created by DivX, Inc.
DivX media files contain highly compressed video with
high visual quality that maintains a relatively small file
size. DivX files can also include advanced media fea-
tures like menus, subtitles, and alternate audio tracks.
Many DivX media files are available for download online,
and you can create your own using your personal con-
tent and easy-to-use tools from DivX.com.
165
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
ISO9660 format
Multi-session
This is the international standard for the format logic of
DVD/CD-ROM folders and files. For the ISO9660 format,
there are regulations for the following two levels.
Multi-session is a recording method that allows addi-
tional data to be recorded later. When recording data on
a CD-ROM, etc., all data from beginning to end is treated
as a single unit or session. Multi-session is a method of
recording more than 2 sessions on one disc.
Level 1:
The file name is in 8.3 format (the name consists of up to
8 characters, half-byte English capital letters, half-byte
numerals and the “_” sign, with a file-extension of three
characters.)
Multi-subtitle
Subtitles in up to 32 languages can be recorded on a sin-
gle DVD, letting you choose as desired.
Level 2:
Optical digital output
The file name can have up to 31 characters (including
By transmitting audio signals in a digital signal format,
the chance of sonic quality deteriorating in the course of
transmission is minimized. An optical digital output is
designed to transmit digital signals optically.
the separation mark “.” and a file extension). Each folder
contains less than 8 hierarchies.
Extended formats
Joliet:
File names can have up to 64 characters.
Romeo:
File names can have up to 128 characters.
Packet write
This is a general term for a method of writing on CD-R,
etc. at the time required for a file, just as is done with
files on floppy or hard discs.
JPEG
This stands for Joint Photographic Experts Group, and is
an international still image compression standard.
Parental lock
Some DVD-Video discs with violent or adult-oriented
scenes feature parental lock which prevents children
from viewing such scenes. With this kind of disc, if you
set the unit’s parental lock level, playback of scenes
inappropriate for children will be disabled, or these
scenes will be skipped.
Linear PCM (LPCM)/Pulse code modulation
This stands for linear pulse code modulation, which is
the signal recording system used for music CDs and
DVDs. Generally, DVDs are recorded with higher sam-
pling frequency and bit rate than CDs. Therefore, DVDs
can provide higher sound quality.
Point of Interest (POI)
Point Of Interest; any of a range of locations stored in
the data, such as railway stations, shops, restaurants,
and amusement parks.
m3u
Playlists created using the “WINAMP” software
have a playlist file extension (.m3u).
Region number
DVD players and DVD discs feature region numbers indi-
cating the area in which they were purchased. Playback
of a DVD is not possible unless it features the same
region number as the DVD player.
MP3
MP3 is short for MPEG Audio Layer 3. It is an audio com-
pression standard set by a working group (MPEG) of the
ISO (International Standards Organization). MP3 is able
to compress audio data to about 1/10th the size of a con-
ventional disc.
Route setting
The process of determining the ideal route to a specific
location; route setting is done automatically by the sys-
tem when you specify a destination.
MPEG
This stands for Moving Pictures Experts Group, and is an
international video image compression standard. Some
DVDs feature digital audio compressed and recorded
using this system.
Set route
The route marked out by the system to your destination.
It is highlighted on the map.
Multi-angle
Title
With regular TV programs, although multiple cameras
are used to simultaneously shoot scenes, only images
from one camera at a time are transmitted to your TV.
Some DVDs feature scenes shot from multiple angles,
letting you choose your viewing angle as desired.
DVD-Video discs have a high data capacity, enabling
recording of multiple movies on a single disc. If, for
example, one disc contains three separate movies, they
are divided into title 1, title 2 and title 3. This lets you
enjoy the convenience of title search and other func-
tions.
Multi-audio (Multilingual dialog)
Some DVDs feature dialog recorded in multiple lan-
guages. Dialog in up to 8 languages can be recorded on
a single disc, letting you choose as desired.
166
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Tracking
Specifications
Dots on the map indicating the route you have traveled.
General
VBR
Rated power source ............ 14.4 V DC
VBR is short for variable bit rate. Generally speaking
CBR (constant bit rate) is more widely used. But by flexi-
bly adjusting the bit rate according to the needs of the
audio compression, it is possible to achieve compres-
sion with a priority on sound quality.
(allowable voltage range:
10.8 V to 15.1 V DC)
Grounding system............... Negative type
Max. current consumption
................................... 10.0 A
Display unit:
Dimensions (W
DIN
Chassis................. 178
Voice guidance
✕
H
✕
D):
The giving of directions by a recorded voice in guidance
mode.
✕
2
50
✕
✕
160 mm
6-1/4 in.)
33 mm
1-3/8 in.)
(7
✕
Way Point
Nose...................... 188
✕
58
✕
A location that you choose to visit before your destina-
tion; a journey can be built up from multiple way points
and the destination.
(7-3/8
✕
2-1/4
✕
D
Chassis................. 178
✕
2
50
✕
✕
165 mm
6-1/2 in.)
28 mm
1-1/4 in.)
(7
✕
WMA
Nose...................... 170
✕
46
✕
WMA is short for Windows Media™ Audio and refers to
an audio compression technology that is developed by
Microsoft Corporation.
(6-3/4
Weight.......................... 2.3 kg (5.1 lbs)
Hideaway unit:
Dimensions (W
...................................... 180
Weight.......................... 0.7 kg (1.5 lbs)
✕
1-3/4
✕
WMA data can be encoded by using Windows Media
Player version 7 or later.
Windows Media and the Windows logo are trademarks
or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the
United States and/or other countries.
✕
H
✕
D):
✕
30
✕
140 mm
Navigation
GPS Receiver:
System.......................... L1, C/Acode GPS
SPS (Standard Positioning
Service)
Reception system........ 8-channel multi-channel
reception system
Reception frequency... 1 575.42 MHz
Sensitivity..................... –130 dBm
Position update frequency
................................... Approx. once per second
GPS antenna:
Antenna........................ Micro strip flat antenna/
right-handed helical polar-
ization
Antenna cable ............. 5.0 m (16 ft. 5 in.)
Dimensions (W
................................... 33
(1-1/4
Weight.......................... 105 g (0.23 lbs)
✕
H
✕
D)
✕
13
✕
✕
36 mm
1/2 1-3/8 in.)
✕
Display
Screen size/aspect ratio ..... 7 inch wide/16:9
(effective display area: 156
✕
89 mm)
Pixels .................................... 336 960 (1 440
✕
234)
Type ...................................... TFT active matrix, transmis-
sive type
Color system........................ NTSC
Operating temperature range
........................................... +14 °F to +122 °F
Storage temperature range
........................................... –4 °F to +176 °F
167
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Angle adjustment ................ 50° to 110°
(Initial setting angle: 90°)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............ 97 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A net-
work)
(CD: 96 dB (1 kHz) (IHF-A
network))
Dynamic range .................... 95 dB (1 kHz)
(CD: 94 dB (1 kHz))
Distortion.............................. 0.008 % (1 kHz)
Output level:
Video............................. 1.0 Vp-p/75 Ω (±0.2 V)
Audio ............................ 1.0 V (1 kHz, 0 dB)
Number of channels ........... 2 (stereo)
MP3 decoding format ......... MPEG-1 & 2 Audio Layer 3
WMA decoding format........ Ver.9.0 L3
AAC decoding format.......... MPEG-4 AAC (only encoded
by iTunes)
Audio
Continuous power output is 22 W per channel minimum
into 4 ohms, both channels driven 50 to 15 000 Hz with
no more than 5% THD.
Maximum power output...... 50 W
50 W
✕
✕
4
2 ch/4 Ω + 70 W
✕
1
ch/2 Ω (for subwoofer)
Load impedance .................. 4 Ω (4 Ω to 8 Ω [2 Ω for 1 ch]
allowable)
Preout max output level/output impedance
........................................... 1.7 V/1 kΩ
Equalizer (3-Band Parametric Equalizer):
Low
: .m4a
Frequency............. 40/80/100/160 Hz
Q Factor ................ 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15
(+6 dB when boosted)
DivX decoding format ......... Home Theater Ver.3, Ver.4,
Ver.5.2
: .avi, .divx
Gain....................... ±12dB
FM tuner
Mid
Frequency range.................. 87.9 MHz to 107.9 MHz
Usable sensitivity................. 8 dBf (0.7 µV/75 Ω, mono,
S/N: 30 dB)
Frequency............. 200 Hz/500 Hz/1 kHz/2 kHz
Q Factor ................ 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15
(+6 dB when boosted)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............ 75 dB (IHF-A network)
Distortion.............................. 0.3 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz, ste-
reo)
0.1 % (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz,
mono)
Frequency response............ 30 Hz to 15 000 Hz (±3 dB)
Stereo separation ................ 45 dB (at 65 dBf, 1 kHz)
Gain....................... ±12dB
High
Frequency............. 3.15/8/10/12.5 kHz
Q Factor ................ 0.35/0.59/0.95/1.15
(+6 dB when boosted)
Gain....................... ±12dB
Loudness contour:
Low................................ +3.5 dB (100 Hz), +3 dB
(10 kHz)
Mid................................ +10 dB (100 Hz), +6.5 dB
(10 kHz)
High .............................. +11 dB (100 Hz), +11 dB
(10 kHz)
AM tuner
Frequency range.................. 530 kHz to 1 710 kHz
(10 kHz)
Usable sensitivity................. 18 µV (S/N: 20 dB)
Signal-to-noise ratio ............ 65 dB (IHF-A network)
(volume: –30 dB)
Note:
HPF:
• Specifications and the design are subject to
possible modifications without notice due to
improvements.
Frequency..................... 50/80/125 Hz
Slope............................. –12 dB/oct
Subwoofer:
Frequency..................... 50/80/125 Hz
Slope............................. –18 dB/oct
Gain............................... ±12dB
Phase............................ Normal/Reverse
DVD Drive
System.................................. DVD-Video, Compact disc
audio, MP3, WMA, AAC,
DivX system
Usable discs......................... DVD-Video, Compact disc,
MP3, WMA, AAC, DivX
Region number.................... 1
Signal format:
Sampling frequency .... 44.1/48/96 kHz
Number of quantization bits
................................... 16/20/24; linear
Frequency response ............ 5 Hz to 44 000 Hz (with DVD,
at sampling frequency
96 kHz)
168
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Display Information
*1: If you touch “Restore Factory Settings”, the registered POI Shortcuts return to the default or fac-
tory settings.
*2: If you touch “Restore Factory Settings”, the setting value return to the default or factory settings.
NAVI MENU
Destination
Address Search
Return Home
P. 29
P. 45, 55
P. 45, 55
P. 43
Go to
POI Search
Vicinity Search*1
P. 44
Address Book
P. 45, 56
P. 45, 56
Destination History
Freeway Search
Telephone Search
Cancel Route
P. 45
P. 45
P. 46
Info/Traffic
Traffic On Route
Traffic Events
Traffic Flow*2
Traffic Settings*2
XM Status
P. 60
P. 59
P. 61
P. 62
P. 65
P. 63
Stock Info
Set My Favorites
My Favorites
P. 64
P. 64
P. 65
P. 50
Emergency Info
Overlay POI*1
169
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Route Options
Edit Current Route
View Current Route
Recalculate
P. 48, 52
P. 47, 52
P. 52
Number of Routes*2
Route Condition*2
Avoid Freeway*2
Avoid Ferry*2
P. 52
P. 52
P. 52
P. 52
Avoid Toll Road*2
P. 53
P. 49
Designate Areas to Avoid
170
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Settings
Volume*2
P. 73
System Options
P. 74, 136
P. 74
Short-Cut Selection
Map Display Options*2
KM/Mile Setting*2
P. 74
Defined Locations
Demo Mode*2
Time
Background Picture Setting
Read from Disc
P. 68, 74
P. 58
P. 76
P. 76, 137
P. 77
Modify Current Location
Hardware Info
Restore Factory Settings
Shortcut menu
P. 172
P. 77
Tracking Display*2
AV Guide Mode*2
Day/Night Display*2
Close-up of Junction*2
Arrow in AV*2
P. 75
P. 75
P. 75
P. 76
P. 76
Set ”Home”
Map in Memory
Set ”Go To”
P. 55, 76
P. 76, 138
P. 55, 76
Connection Status
3D Calibration
P. 70, 77
P. 70, 77
P. 77
Service Info Screen
171
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Shortcut menu
be selected with the system as default setting.
➲ Changing a shortcut ➞ Page 74
Shortcut menu
: Destination*3
P. 36, 41
: Change Route*3
: Registration
Reroute
P. 48
P. 46
P. 47
P. 47
P. 49
P. 48
P. 36, 56
P. 36
Cancel Route
Route Profile
: Vicinity Search*1
:Volume Setting
: Whole Route Overview
: Overlay POI*1
: Address Book
P. 73
Route Scroll
P. 47
Skip Way Point
P. 50
P. 45, 56
: Route Options
Route Options
P. 170
P. 48, 52
: Edit Current Route
: Traffic On Route
: Stock Info
P. 60
P. 63
P. 64
P. 64
: Set My Favorites
: My Favorites
172
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
Menu in the AV Screen
Sound menu
Sound
FAD/BAL (Balance)
EQ Menu
P. 124
P. 124
P. 125
P. 125
P. 125
P. 126
P. 126
Staging
Loudness
Sub Woofer (Non Fading)
HPF
SLA
Initial menu
Initial
Rear SP
Preout
P. 129
P. 129
Rear SP
PIN Edit
P. 129
P. 129
Mute Input/Guide
5.1CH
P. 130
173
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
USB
Function
Function menu
DVD-Video
Function
Repeat
Random
Scan
P. 95
P. 95
P. 95
Repeat
P. 83
P. 83
P. 126
L/R Select
DVD/Divx Setup
XM
Function
CD/ROM
Function
Memo
P. 100
Repeat
Random
Scan
P. 87
P. 87
P. 87
SIRIUS
Function
Memo
P. 103
P. 104
P. 104
DivX
Game Alert
Game Info
Function
Repeat
P. 88
BT-TEL
DVD/Divx Setup
P. 126
Function
RADIO
Phone Register
Phonebook Name View
Clear Memory
Auto Answer
P. 109
Function
P. 111
P. 111
BSM
Local
P. 92
P. 92
P. 112
M-DVD
P. 113
P. 114
Function
P. 114
P. 114
P. 114
P. 114
Refuse All Calls
Ring Tone
Repeat
Random
Scan
P. 93
P. 93
P. 93
Auto Connect
Echo Cancel
175
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
iPod
Function
Repeat
P. 117
P. 117
P. 117
P. 117
Shuffle
Wide Screen
iPod Charge
BT-AUDIO
Function
Connection Open
Disconnect
P. 119
P. 119
P. 119
Device Info
176
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
DVD/DivX Setup menu
DVD/DivX Setup
P. 126
Menu Language
Language
P. 126
P. 126
Assist Subtitle
Multi Angle
TV Aspect
Parental
P. 127
P. 127
P. 127
P. 127
P. 128
P. 128
P. 128
P. 126
DivX VOD
Auto Play
Subtitle File
177
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
PIONEER CORPORATION
4-1, MEGURO 1-CHOME, MEGURO-KU, TOKYO 153-8654, JAPAN
PIONEER ELECTRONICS (USA) INC.
P.O. Box 1540, Long Beach, California 90801-1540, U.S.A.
TEL: (800) 421-1404
PIONEER EUROPE NV
Haven 1087, Keetberglaan 1, B-9120 Melsele, Belgium
TEL: (0) 3/570.05.11
PIONEER ELECTRONICS ASIACENTRE PTE. LTD.
253 Alexandra Road, #04-01, Singapore 159936
TEL: 65-6472-7555
PIONEER ELECTRONICS AUSTRALIA PTY. LTD.
178-184 Boundary Road, Braeside, Victoria 3195, Australia
TEL: (03) 9586-6300
PIONEER ELECTRONICS OF CANADA, INC.
300 Allstate Parkway, Markham, Ontario L3R 0P2, Canada
TEL: 1-877-283-5901
PIONEER ELECTRONICS DE MEXICO, S.A. de C.V.
Blvd.Manuel Avila Camacho 138 10 piso
Col.Lomas de Chapultepec, Mexico, D.F. 11000
TEL:55-9178-4270
Published by Pioneer Corporation.
Copyright © 2007 by Pioneer Corporation.
All rights reserved.
Printed in China
<CRB2449-A/U> UC
Download from Www.Somanuals.com. All Manuals Search And Download.
<KMZHX> <07G00000>
|
Pentax Digital Camera 33WR User Manual
Philips TV Cables SWA2415WH 27 User Manual
Philips Water System AC4141 User Manual
Planar Computer Monitor LC1503R User Manual
Polaroid Flat Panel Television TLA 04011C User Manual
Polycom Telephone 7941 User Manual
Powerex Air Compressor AS XXX User Manual
PowerFile CD Player C200 Studio User Manual
Printek Printer Mt2 Series User Manual
ProForm Treadmill PFTL715053 User Manual